BNP C3015 PDF

CNC
AC SPINDLE
MDS-B-SPT Series
MDS-C1-SPT Series
SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTRUCTION MANUAL
BNP-C3015A(ENG)
Introduction
Thank you for selecting the Mitsubishi spindle drive unit. This instruction manual
describes the handling and caution points for using this AC spindle.
Incorrect handling may lead to unforeseen accidents, so always read this instruction
manual thoroughly to ensure correct usage.
Make sure that this instruction manual is delivered to the end user.
Always store this manual in a safe place.
All specifications for the MDS-B/C1-SPT Series are described in this manual. However,
each CNC may not be provided with all specifications, so refer to the specifications for
the CNC on hand before starting use.
Notes on Reading This Manual

(1) This is the MDS-B/C1-SPT Series Specifications Manual corresponding to
the Toshiba Machine CNC "TOSNUC 888.2".
(2) Since the description of this specification manual deals with the spindle system in
general, for the specifications of individual machine tools, refer to the manuals
issued by the respective machine manufacturers.
The "restrictions" and "available functions" described in the manuals issued by
the machine manufacturers have precedence to those in this manual.
(3) This manual describes as many special operations as possible, but it should be
kept in mind that items not mentioned in this manual cannot be performed.
Precautions for safety
Please read this manual and auxiliary documents before starting installation, operation,
maintenance or inspection to ensure correct usage. Thoroughly understand the device, safety
information and precautions before starting operation.
The safety precautions in this instruction manual are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
Incorrect handling could lead to a hazardous situation and result in

WARNING fatalities or serious injuries.
When a dangerous situation may occur if handling is mistaken

CAUTION leading to medium or minor injuries, or physical damage.
Note that some items described as CAUTION may lead to major results depending on
the situation. In any case, important information that must be observed is described.
i
1) In this manual, the following items are generically called the "spindle amplifier".
Spindle drive unit

Power supply unit
Changes to terminal names
The terminal names have been changed in two stages as shown below.
Before Between April 1995
After April 1996
March 1995 and March 1996
R R/L1 L1
S S/L2 L2
Terminal name
T T/L3 L3
P L+/P L+
N L-/N L-
Ro L11/Ro L11
So L21/So L21
G G/
ii
For Safety Use
1. Electric shock prevention
WARNING
Do not open the spindle amplifier's front cover or the spindle motor's terminal box cover while
the power is ON or during operation. Failure to observe this could result in electric shocks.
Do not turn the power ON with the spindle amplifier's front cover or spindle motor's terminal box
cover removed. The high voltage terminals and charged sections will be exposed, and could
result in electric shocks.
Do not remove the front cover even when the power is OFF except for wiring work or periodic
inspections. The spindle amplifier is charged and could result in electric shocks.
Wait at least 10 minutes after turning the power OFF and LED on spindle amplifier turning OFF
before starting wiring or inspections. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
Ground the spindle motor and spindle amplifier with Class 3 or higher grounding.
Wiring, maintenance, and inspection work must be done by a qualified technician.
Wire the spindle motor and spindle amplifier after installation. Failure to observe this could
Do not operate the spindle amplifier switches with wet hands. Failure to observe this could
result in electric shocks..
Do not damage, apply forcible stress, place heavy items on the cables or get them caught.
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
2. Fire prevention
CAUTION
Install the spindle motor, spindle amplifier, and regenerative resistor on non-combustible
material. Direct installation on combustible material or near combustible materials could lead to
fires.
Shut off the power on the spindle amplifier's power side, if a fault occurs in the spindle
amplifier. Fires could be caused if a large current continues to flow.
When using the regenerative resistor, shut off the power with an error signal. The
regenerative resistor could abnormally overheat and cause a fire due to a fault in the
regenerative transistor, etc.
3. Injury prevention
CAUTION
Do not apply a voltage on each terminal other than that indicated in the Specification Manual or
Instruction Manual. Failure to observe this item could lead to ruptures or damage, etc.
Do not mistake the terminal connections. Failure to observe this item could lead to ruptures or
damage, etc.
Do not mistake the DC voltage polarity (+, -). Failure to observe this item could lead to ruptures
or damage, etc.
The spindle amplifier cooling fins, regenerative resistor and spindle motor, etc., will be hot
during operation and for a short time after operation is stopped. Touching these sections
could result in burns.
iii
4. Various precautions
Observe the following precautions. Incorrect handling of the unit could lead to faults, injuries and
electric shocks, etc.
(1) Transportation and installation
CAUTION
Correctly transport the product according to its mass.
Use the spindle motor's suspension bolts only to transport the spindle motor.
Do not transport the spindle motor when it is installed on the machine.
Do not stack the spindle motors and spindle amplifiers above the indicated limit.
Do not hold the cables, shaft or detector when transporting the spindle motor.
Do not transport the spindle amplifier by holding the connected wires or cables.
Do not hold the front cover, side covers or fins when transporting the spindle amplifier. The
amplifier could drop or be damaged.
Follow the instruction manual, and install the spindle motor and spindle amplifier at a place
which can withstand the mass.
Do not get on the spindle motor or spindle amplifier.
Do not place heavy objects on the spindle motor or spindle amplifier.
Always observe the indicated spindle motor and spindle amplifier installation direction.
Provide the specified distance between the spindle amplifier and inner surface of the control
panel and between other devices.
Do not install or operate a spindle motor or spindle amplifier that is damaged or missing parts.
Provide the specified distance between the spindle motor cooling fan's intake/outtake ports and
other devices and between other machines' metal parts.
Do not allow conductive matters such as screws or metal pieces, or combustible matters such
as oil enter the spindle motor or spindle amplifier.
The spindle motor and spindle amplifier are precision devices. Do not drop them or apply strong
impacts.
Store and use the spindle motor and spindle amplifier within the following environmental
conditions.
Conditions
Environment
Spindle amplifier Spindle motor
Ambient temperature 0C to +55C (with no freezing) 0C to +40C (with no freezing)
80%RH or less
Ambient humidity To follow separate specifications
(with no dew condensation)
Storage temperature To follow separate specifications -15C to +70C
Storage humidity 90% RH or less

To follow separate specifications
(with no dew condensation)
Indoors (Where unit is not subject to direct sunlight)
Atmosphere
With no corrosive gas, combustible gas, oil mist or dust
Altitude 1000m or less above sea level
Vibration To follow separate specifications
iv
CAUTION
Securely fix the spindle motor onto the machine. Insufficient fixing may result in dislocation
during operation.
Always provide a cover, etc., on the shaft so that the spindle motor's rotating sections
cannot be touched while the spindle motor is rotating.
When coupling the spindle motor's shaft end to the machine's shaft, pulley or gears, etc., do
not apply an impact on the spindle motor with a hammer, etc. Failure to observe this could
result in bearing damage or detector faults.
Do not apply a load exceeding the tolerable load onto the spindle motor shaft. Failure to
observe this could result in bearing damage or shaft breakage.
Consult with the Service Center or Service Station when storing the spindle motor or spindle
amplifier for a long time.
(2) Wiring
CAUTION
Correctly and securely perform the wiring. Failure to do so could lead to runaway of the
spindle motor.
Spindle amplifier
Do not install a condensing capacitor, surge absorber or radio
noise filter on the output side of the spindle amplifier. VIN
(24VDC)
Correctly connect the output side (terminals U, V, W). Failure to
do so could lead to abnormal operation of the spindle motor.
Do not directly connect a commercial power supply to Control output
signal
the spindle motor. Doing so could lead to faults.
When using an inductive load such as a relay on the control output signal, always connect
a diode in parallel to the load as a measure against noise.
When using a capacitance load such as a lamp for the control output signal, always
connect a protective resistor serially to the load as a measure against noise.
Do not mistake the polarity of the noise (surge) absorption diode installed on the DC relay
for the control output signal. The faulty signal will not be output and the spindle amplifier
could fail.
Do not connect or disconnect the cables connected to each connector or terminal while
the power is ON.
Securely tighten the cable connector fixing screw or fixing mechanism. Insufficient fixing
could result in dislocation while the power is ON.
If use of a shielded cable is indicated in the connection diagram for the signal wires
connected to the spindle amplifier, always use a shielded cable, and always connect the
shield to the connector clamp.
Always separate the signal wires connected to the spindle motor and spindle amplifier
from the drive wires and power wires.
Always use wires and cables having a wire diameter, heat resistance and flexibility
compatible with the system.
Fix part of the cable connected to each spindle amplifier connector to part of the control
panel so that connector is not pulled forward or vertically.
Do not relay the speed detector or position detector cables. Failure to observe this could
result in vibration, noise or positional deviation.
v
(3) Trial operation and adjustment
WARNING
When adjusting the drive unit with a personal computer, some parameters will be validated as
soon as they are changed. Take special care when making adjustments while rotating the
spindle, and take care not to approach body parts near the spindle. Failure to observe this
could result in personal injury.
When monitoring the state of the spindle or spindle motor with a personal computer, if the
spindle motor's maximum speed is set to 33000r/min or more or if parameter SP257 is set to
"0002", the spindle motor speed displayed on the personal computer will be half of the actual
speed. Failure to note this could result in spindle damage.
CAUTION
Check each parameter before starting operation. Unpredictable movements could result
depending on the machine.
Do not make remarkable adjustments and changes as the operation could become unstable.
(4) Usage methods
CAUTION
Install an external emergency stop circuit so that the operation can be stopped and power
shut off immediately.
Turn the power OFF immediately if any smoke, abnormal noise or odors are generated from
the spindle motor or spindle amplifier.
Only a qualified technician may disassemble or repair this product.
Never make modifications.
Connect a noise filter, etc., on the spindle amplifier power lead-in wire to reduce the effect of
electromagnetic disturbances. Electronic devices used near the spindle amplifier could be
affected by the electromagnetic disturbances.
Use the spindle motor, spindle amplifier and regenerative resistor in the designated
combination. Failure to observe this could result in fires or faults.
After changing the parameters, maintenance or inspection, always carry out a trial operation
before starting actual operation.
Do not place hands or feet near the spindle during rotation.
Use the power (input voltage, input frequency, tolerable sudden power failure time) under the
power specification conditions given in the individual Specifications.
Install a surge killer on coils for solenoid valves and contactors, etc., used near the spindle
amplifier to prevent noise. Failure to do so could result in malfunctions.
(5) Troubleshooting
CAUTION
If a hazardous situation could arise during a power failure or product fault, provide an external
brake mechanism for holding purposes.
Turn the power OFF if an alarm occurs.
Never go near the machine after restoring the power after an instantaneous power failure, as
the machine could start suddenly. (Design the machine so that personal safety can be
ensured even if the machine starts suddenly.)
vi
(6) Maintenance, inspection and part replacement
CAUTION
Back up the spindle amplifier parameters before starting maintenance or inspections.
The capacity of the electrolytic capacitor will drop due to deterioration. To prevent secondary
damage due to failures, replacing this part every five years when used under a normal
environment is recommended. Contact the Service Center or Service Station for replacement.
Never perform a megger test (insulation resistance measurement) on the spindle amplifier
during inspections.
(7) Disposal
CAUTION
Handle this product as general industrial waste. If heat radiating fins are exposed on the back
of the spindle amplifier, a CFC substitute is in use. These models must not be handled as
general industrial waste and must always be returned to the Service Center or Service
Station.
Do not disassemble the spindle motor or spindle amplifier.
(8) General precautions
CAUTION
To explain the details, drawings given in this manual, etc., may show the unit with the cover or safety
partition removed. Always install the cover or partitions at their original position before turning the
spindle motor or spindle amplifier power ON, and operate as indicated in the manual, etc.
vii
Compliance to European EC Directives
1. European EC Directives
The European EC Directives were issued to unify standards in the EU Community, and to ensure
smooth distribution of products for which safety is ensured. In the EU Community, the attachment of a
CE mark (CE marking) is mandatory to indicate that the basic safety conditions of the Machine
directives (issued Jan. 1994), EMC Directives (issued Jan. 1996) and the Low-voltage Directives
(issued Jan. 1997) are satisfied. The machines and devices in which the servo and spindle drive are
assembled are a target for CE marking.
The spindle drive does not function independently, and is a component designed to be used in
combination with a machine or device. Thus, the spindle drive is not directly targeted by the Directives,
but a CE mark must be attached to machines and devices in which it is assembled.
"EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES", (BNP-B8582-45) which explains the servo amplifier installation
and control panel manufacturing methods, etc., have been prepared for the MDS-B/C1 Series to
facilitate CE marking of the machine and device in which this product is assembled, to realize
compliance with low-voltage directive related standards, and realize compliance with EMC Directives.
Contact Mitsubishi or your dealer for more information.
2. Cautions for EC Directive compliance

Use the Low-voltage Directive compatible parts for the spindle drive and spindle motor. In addition to
the items described in this instruction manual, observe the items described below.
(1) Configuration
Control panel
Reinforced
isolating Servo/
transformer No-fuse Electromagnetic spindle
drive Motor
breaker contactor
(servo/spindle)
NFB MC
(2) Environment
Use the spindle drive within a Pollution Class 2 or less environment as stipulated in IEC664.
Install the spindle drive in control panel having a structure (IP54) which does not permit the entry
of water, oil, carbon or dust, etc.
(3) Power supply

(a) Use the spindle drive under the Overvoltage Category II conditions stipulated in IEC664.
Install a reinforced isolating transformer complying with IEC or EN Standards at the power
input section.
viii
(4) Grounding
(a) To prevent electric shocks, always connect the spindle amplifier protective earth (PE)
terminal (terminal with mark) to the protective earth (PE) on the control panel. (Always
ground even when using an earth leakage breaker.)
(b) When connecting the earthing wire to the protective earth (PE) terminal, do not tighten the
wire terminals together. Always connect one wire to one terminal.
PE terminal PE terminal
(5) Wiring
(a) Always use crimp terminals with insulation tubes so that the wires connected to the spindle
amplifier terminal block do not contact the neighboring terminals.
Crimp terminal
Insulation tube
Wire
(6) Peripheral devices and options

(a) Use no-fuse breakers and magnetic contacts which comply with EN/IEC Standards.
(b) Select the wire size according to EN60204. (Refer to section (8.3 7).)
(7) Miscellaneous
Refer to "EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES" for methods on complying with the EMC
Directives.
ix
CONTENTS
I. MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle System Configuration Section

1. Outline ................................................................................................................................. I-1
1.1 Features ...................................................................................................................... I-1
1.2 Precautions for use...................................................................................................... I-2
2. System Configuration .......................................................................................................... I-3
3. Unit Installation.................................................................................................................... I-7
4. Connection of Each Unit...................................................................................................... I-9
4.1 Layout of each unit .................................................................................................... I-10
4.2 Link bar specifications ............................................................................................... I-10
4.3 Precautions for installing multiple power supply units ............................................... I-12
4.4 Precautions when installing multiple spindle drive units to one power supply unit.... I-13
5. Connector and Cable Specifications ................................................................................. I-14
5.1 Half pitch connector and cable connection system ................................................... I-14
5.2 Cable details.............................................................................................................. I-15
5.2.1 SH21 cable (Semi-ordered part) [For B/C1-CV B/C1-SPT connection]........... I-15
5.2.2 Spindle control circuit cable list ........................................................................... I-16
5.2.3 Cable assembly procedure ................................................................................. I-21
6. Outline Drawing................................................................................................................. I-25
6.1 List of outlines............................................................................................................ I-25
6.2 Power supply unit ...................................................................................................... I-26
6.3 Spindle drive unit ....................................................................................................... I-27
6.4 AC reactor ................................................................................................................. I-28
6.5 Contactor ................................................................................................................... I-29
6.6 NFB ........................................................................................................................... I-29
7. Heating Value.................................................................................................................... I-30
8. Selection of Capacity......................................................................................................... I-31
8.1 Selection of the power supply unit (MDS-B/C1-CV) .................................................. I-31
8.2 Selection of the power supply capacity ..................................................................... I-31
8.3 Selection of wire size................................................................................................. I-32
8.4 Selection of AC reactor, contactor and NFB.............................................................. I-35
II. MDS-B/C1-CV Power Regeneration Type Power Supply Section

1. Power Supply Unit.............................................................................................................. II-1
1.1 Model configuration .................................................................................................... II-1
1.2 List of specifications ................................................................................................... II-2
1.3 Hardware and parameter setting ................................................................................ II-3
1.4 Status display ............................................................................................................. II-4
1.4.1 7-segment LED display ........................................................................................ II-4
1.4.2 Charge lamp......................................................................................................... II-4
1.5 List of alarms and warnings........................................................................................ II-5
1.6 Explanation of connectors and terminal block ............................................................ II-7
1.7 Functions added with MDS-B Series
(Power supply external emergency stop function)...................................................... II-8
1.8 Main circuit connection ............................................................................................. II-10
x
III. MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle Drive Unit System Section
1. Model, Configuration and Connection ............................................................................... III-1
1.1 Model configuration ................................................................................................... III-1
1.2 Configuration ............................................................................................................. III-2
1.2.1 Basic configuration (No additional specifications) ............................................... III-2
1.2.2 With orientation function...................................................................................... III-2
1.3 Device-to-device connections.................................................................................... III-4
2. Specifications .................................................................................................................... III-5
2.1 AC spindle motor and controller specifications.......................................................... III-5
2.2 Output characteristics................................................................................................ III-9
2.3 Outline dimension drawings .................................................................................... III-11
2.3.1 Motor ................................................................................................................. III-11
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings........................................................................... III-16
3.1 Status display with 7-segment LED......................................................................... III-17
3.2 Spindle parameters ................................................................................................. III-18
3.3 Spindle specification parameters screen................................................................. III-39
3.4 Spindle monitor screen............................................................................................ III-40
3.5 Control input signals ................................................................................................ III-41
3.6 Control output signals.............................................................................................. III-43
3.7 Meter outputs........................................................................................................... III-46
3.8 Output interface ....................................................................................................... III-48
4. Optional Specifications and Parts ................................................................................... III-49
4.1 Orientation specifications (optional) ........................................................................ III-49
4.1.1 1-point orientation using magnetic sensor ........................................................ III-49
4.1.2 4096-point orientation using encoder................................................................ III-57
4.1.3 4096-point orientation using motor built-in encoder .......................................... III-60
4.1.4 Operation of orientation..................................................................................... III-60
4.2 Synchronous tap function (option)........................................................................... III-63
4.2.1 Closed type synchronous tap............................................................................ III-63
4.2.2 Semi-closed type synchronous tap ................................................................... III-63
4.2.3 Operation of synchronous tap ........................................................................... III-63
4.3 C-axis control (optional)........................................................................................... III-64
4.3.1 When using encoder (OSE90K+1024 BKO-NC6336H01) ................................ III-64
4.3.2 When using built-in encoder (MBE90K) ............................................................ III-67
4.3.3 When using built-in encoder (MHE90K) ............................................................ III-67
4.4 Single parts (optionally supplied parts).................................................................... III-68
4.4.1 Power step-down transformer ........................................................................... III-68
4.4.2 Noise filter ......................................................................................................... III-70
4.5 Other optional specifications ................................................................................... III-72
4.6 Theoretical acceleration and deceleration times ..................................................... III-73
IV. Maintenance MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle System Configuration Section

1. Starting up the System ......................................................................................................IV-1
1.1 Startup procedures ....................................................................................................IV-1
1.2 Status display with 7-segment LED...........................................................................IV-2
2. Adding and Replacing Units and Parts..............................................................................IV-3
2.1 Replacing the unit......................................................................................................IV-3
2.2 Unit fan ......................................................................................................................IV-6
3. Daily Maintenance.............................................................................................................IV-7
3.1 Maintenance tools .....................................................................................................IV-7
3.2 Periodic inspections...................................................................................................IV-7
4. Maintenance Parts ............................................................................................................IV-9
5. Selection of Leakage Breaker .........................................................................................IV-10
6. Noise Filter ......................................................................................................................IV-11
xi
V. Maintenance MDS-B-CVE/MDS-C1/CV Power Supply Section
1. Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................. V-1
1.1 Status display ............................................................................................................. V-1
1.2 Troubleshooting according to power supply alarm ..................................................... V-3
1.3 Power supply warning .............................................................................................. V-12
VI. Maintenance MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle Drive Unit Section

1. Adjustment Procedures .....................................................................................................VI-1
1.1 Starting up .................................................................................................................VI-1
1.2 Confirming the speed loop.........................................................................................VI-1
1.2.2 Adjusting and confirming the motor (spindle) speed ...........................................VI-1
1.2.3 Adjusting the deceleration time ...........................................................................VI-2
1.3 Adjusting the orientation ............................................................................................VI-2
1.3.1 Operation ............................................................................................................VI-2
1.3.2 Operation sequence............................................................................................VI-2
1.3.3 Encoder orientation/motor built-in encoder orientation stop position ..................VI-3
1.3.4 Diagram of orientation parameter relation...........................................................VI-4
1.3.5 Preparation for motor built-in encoder orientation adjustment ............................VI-4
1.3.6 Preparation for encoder orientation adjustment ..................................................VI-5
1.3.7 Preparation for magnetic sensor orientation adjustment.....................................VI-6
1.3.8 Adjusting the orientation......................................................................................VI-7
1.3.9 Adjusting the servo rigidity ..................................................................................VI-7
1.3.10 Delay/advance control and PI control................................................................VI-8
1.3.11 Troubleshooting for orientation trouble .............................................................VI-8
1.4 Adjusting the synchronous tap ................................................................................VI-10
2. Troubleshooting...............................................................................................................VI-11
2.1 Introduction..............................................................................................................VI-11
2.2 Step 1 ......................................................................................................................VI-11
2.3 Step 2 ......................................................................................................................VI-12
2.4 List of alarms and warnings.....................................................................................VI-15
2.5 Approach per phenomenon .....................................................................................VI-16
2.5.1 Details when alarm or warning is displayed on the 7-segment display .............VI-16
2.5.2 Details when alarm or warning is not displayed on 7-segment unit ..................VI-25
2.6 Periodic inspections.................................................................................................VI-28
2.6.1 Inspecting the control unit .................................................................................VI-28
2.6.2 Inspecting the motor..........................................................................................VI-28
3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor ......................................................................VI-29
3.1 Disassembling and assembling the SJ type AC spindle motor ...............................VI-29
3.2 Disassembling and assembling the SJ-N type AC spindle motor............................VI-37
4. Handling the Orientation Detector ...................................................................................VI-46
4.1 Magnetic sensor type 1-point orientation.................................................................VI-46
4.1.1 Operation of magnet and sensor.......................................................................VI-46
4.1.2 Sequences, etc. ................................................................................................VI-47
4.2 Encoder type 4096-point orientation........................................................................VI-47
4.2.1 Configuration.....................................................................................................VI-47
4.2.2 Sequences, etc. ................................................................................................VI-47
4.3 Motor built-in encoder type 4-96-point orientation ...................................................VI-47
4.3.1 Sequences, etc. ................................................................................................VI-47
xii
Appendix 1 Parameter Setting List ..........................................................................................1
Appendix 2 Unit Conversion Table ..........................................................................................1
Appendix 3 Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications ..................................1
1. Outline.................................................................................................................................1
2. List of units ..........................................................................................................................1
3. Selection of AC reactor (B-AL), contactor and NFB............................................................1
4. Outline of units ....................................................................................................................2
5. Panel cut dimension drawing ..............................................................................................3
6. Detailed outline drawing......................................................................................................4
7. Heating value ......................................................................................................................7
8. Selection of power capacity ................................................................................................7
9. Selecting of wire size ..........................................................................................................7
10. Drive unit connection screw size.......................................................................................8
11. Connection of Each Unit ...................................................................................................8
12. Restrictions .....................................................................................................................10
13. Parameters .....................................................................................................................11
14. Precautions .....................................................................................................................11
xiii
I. MDS-B/C1-SPT
Spindle System Configuration Section
1. Outline
1. Outline
1.1 Features
(1) High-speed serial communication with CNC
A high-speed serial communication function, compatible with the Toshiba Machine CNC
"TOSNUC 888.2" has been incorporated.
(2) Compact and lightweight

The volume, installation area and mass have been drastically reduced with the incorporation of high
density mounted electronic parts IPM (Intelligent Power Module) and the high performance heat
dissipation fin.
(3) Standardization of dimensions

Mounting in cabinets has been made easy by unifying the height and inner-panel depth dimensions
of all power supply unit and spindle drive unit capacities.
(4) Low heat generation

The amount of heat generated has been greatly reduced by incorporating the IPM.
(5) Separable units

Separable converter sections and inverter sections allows the optimum unit matching the motor
characteristics to be selected.
Multiple inverters can be driven with one converter to handle multi-axis machines.
(6) High-speed and precision processing

A high-speed CPU has been mounted to improve the cutting performance and accuracy.
(7) High-speed spindle orientation

Smooth operations and minimum orientation times have been realized by using the high-speed
orientation method which allows direct orientation from the maximum speed.
(8) Simple parameter input

All parameters can be input from the personal computer allowing startup and adjustments to be
completed in a short time.
(9) MDS-B/V1 Series features

(a) European Safety Standard compliant
This system is compatible with European Safety Standards (LVD Directives). (Refer to
"Compliance with European EC Directives" for details.)
(Note that the target models in the B/C1 Series are limited to the CV (power regeneration
power supply) and SPT (spindle drive.)
(b) Addition of power supply emergency stop input line

When using the B/C1 Series, if the emergency stop hot line from the NC is disabled for any
reason, the external contactor can be directly cut off with from the power supply.
(This function is validated with the rotary switch and connected drive's parameter settings.)
I-1
1. Outline
1.2 Precautions for use

(1) The motor rated output is guaranteed when the power supply unit's input voltage is 200VAC or
more. The rated output may not be achieved if the input voltage fluctuates and drops below this
level.
(2) A higher harmonic chopper voltage, controlled by PWM, is applied on the motor causing a higher
harmonic leakage current to flow when the motor is running.
A general-purpose earth leakage breaker could malfunction due to the effect of this higher
harmonic, so always use an earth leakage breaker for inverters.
(3) The above higher harmonic leakage current also flows to the grounding wire between the motor
and drive unit. If this grounding wire is placed near the NC's CRT screen, the CRT screen could
malfunction due to the effect of the leakage current's magnetic field. Keep the grounding wire as far
away from the CRT screen as possible.
(4) Noise may occur in AM radio broadcasts due to the electromagnetic wave noise generated from the
motor and drive unit.
Separate radios and the motor and drive unit as far as possible.
A filter for radio noise measures is available as an option, so use one if necessary.
(5) When adjusting the drive unit with a personal computer, some parameters will be validated as soon
as they are changed. Take special care when making adjustments while rotating the spindle, and
take care not to approach body parts near the spindle. Failure to observe this could result in
machine damage or personal injury.
(6) Do not relay the speed detector or position detector cables. Doing so could result malfunctions
caused by the motor power cable or noise from other devices.
Any relays made are the responsibility of the user, and measures against noise must be provided.
I-2
2. System Configuration
WARNING
1. Wiring and inspection work must be done by a qualified technician.
2. Wait at least 10 minutes after turning the power OFF and LED on spindle amplifier turning
OFF before starting wiring or inspections. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
3. Wire the spindle motor and spindle amplifier after installation. Failure to observe this could
4. Do not damage, apply forcible stress, place heavy items on the cables or get them caught.
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
CAUTION
1. Correctly and securely perform the wiring. Failure to do so could lead to runaway of the
spindle motor, or to injuries.
2. Do not mistake the names of the terminals for connecting the cables. Failure to observe this
could result in rupture or faults.
Spindle amplifier
3. Do not mistake the DC voltage polarity (+, -). Failure to
observe this item could lead to ruptures or damage, etc.
VIN
4. Do not mistake the polarity of the noise (surge) absorption (24VDC)
diode installed on the DC relay for the control output signal.
The faulty signal will not be output and the spindle amplifier
could fail. Control output
5. Electronic devices used near the spindle amplifier could be signal
affected by the electromagnetic disturbances. Connect a
noise filter, etc., on the power lead-in wire to reduce the
effect of electromagnetic disturbances. (Refer to III. Spindle
drive unit section 4.4.2.)
6. Do not use a phase-advancing capacitor, surge killer or noise filter on the spindle motor's
power wire.
7. If a spindle motor or spindle amplifier fails, cut off the power with the fault output. The
regenerative resistor could abnormally overheat and ignite due to a fault in the regenerative
transistor, etc.
8. Never modify the spindle motor or spindle amplifier.
9. Precautions for using MDS-B Series
1) The rush sequence of the power supply unit's MDS-B-CV-370 differs from other power
supplies, so always install an external contactor. Do not share the contactor with other
power supplies.
I-3
(1) Basic system configuration
Spindle drive Power supply

NC unit unit
(PC)
CN CN CN
1A 4 4
7
8
MDS-B/C1-SPT MDS-B/C1-CV
CN
5
6
Link bar
L+, L-
Control power RS
L11, L21
MC1
U V W L1 L2 L3
Power supply RST
AC NFB 200VAC
Spindle Con-
ENC reactor 1 IN
motor tactor
Magnetic
sensor B-AL
Spindle motor Spindle motor fan power

supply ST NFB
2
(Note 1) Always install the spindle drive unit next to the power supply unit.
(Note 2) Wire the AC reactor to the front (NF side) of the contactor.
(Note 3) Whether or not to install a contactor can be selected only for the MDS-C1-CV-300 and
smaller capacities.
For safety purposes, use the state with no contactor only when the system configuration
ensures that problems can be avoided when trouble occurs.
Set the rotary switch on the power supply unit according to whether the contactor is installed.
Contactor installed : Rotary switch setting = 0
Contactor not installed : Rotary switch setting = 1
(Note 4) Always install the AC reactor. (The reactor is supplied from Mitsubishi.)
(Note 5) Always install a surge killer on the contactor.
I-4
(2) List of units

(a) MDS-B Series Power supply unit ..... DC power supply to drive unit/regenerative control
Capa- Mass Dimensions Correspondence to drive unit capacity (MDS-B-SPT)
No. Model city (kg) HWD (mm) Type 04 075 15 22 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370
(kW)
1 B-CVE-37 3.7 5.0 38060300
2 B-CVE-55 5.5 5.0 38060300 A1
3 B-CVE-75 7.5 5.0 38060300
4 B-CVE-110 11.0 8.5 38090300 B1
5 B-CVE-150 15.0 10.5 380120300
C1
6 B-CVE-185 18.5 10.5 380120300
7 B-CVE-220 22.0 12.5 380150300
8 B-CVE-260 26.0 12.5 380150300
D1
9 B-CVE-300 30.0 12.5 380150300
10 B-CVE-370 37.0 12.5 380150300
(b) MDS-C1 Series Power supply unit ..... DC power supply to drive unit/regenerative control
Capa- Mass Dimensions Correspondence to drive unit capacity (MDS-B-SPT)
No. Model city (kg) HWD (mm) Type 04 075 15 22 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370
(kW)
1 C1-CV-37 3.7 5.0 38060200
2 C1-CV-55 5.5 5.0 38060200 A2
3 C1-CV-75 7.5 5.0 38060200
4 C1-CV-110 11.0 8.5 38090255 B2
5 C1-CV-150 15.0 10.5 380120255
C2
6 C1-CV-185 18.5 10.5 380120255
7 C1-CV-220 22.0 12.5 380150255
8 C1-CV-260 26.0 12.5 380150255
D2
9 C1-CV-300 30.0 12.5 380150255
10 C1-CV-370 37.0 12.5 380150255
(Note 1) The power supply unit and spindle drive unit combination may differ from the above
combinations.
The power supply capacity is determined by the motor output, and the spindle drive unit
capacity is determined by the motor characteristics.
(Note 2) Refer to "Appendix 3 Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications" for details on
the MDS-B-CVE-450 and SPT-370, 450 and 550.
I-5
(3) List of unit dimensions

Outline
A1 B1 C1 D1
type
W: 60
(Fin section D: 120) W: 90 W: 120 W: 150

D: 300 D: 300 D: 300
D: 300 Fin section: 120 Fin section: 120 Fin section: 120
180
Outline
drawing
H: 380 H: 380 H: 380 H: 380
(mm)
The A0 type has no fin.

(Depth: 180)
Outline
A2 B2 C2 D2
type
W: 60
(Fin section D: 120) W: 90 W: 120 W: 150

D: 300 D: 300 D: 300
D: 300 Fin section: 120 Fin section: 120 Fin section: 120
180
Outline
drawing
H: 380 H: 380 H: 380 H: 380
(mm)
The A0 type has no fin.

(Depth: 180)
I-6
3. Unit Installation
CAUTION
1. Correctly transport the product according to its mass. Failure to observe this could result in
injury.
2. Do not stack the product above the indicated limit.
3. Install the product on non-combustible material. Installation directly on or near combustible
materials could result in fires.
4. When installing, always observe this manual and install on a place which can withstand the
mass.
5. Do not get on the product, or place heavy objects on it. Failure to observe this could result in
injury.
6. Use the product within the designated environment conditions.
7. Do not allow conductive matters such as screws or metal pieces, or combustible matters such
as oil enter the spindle amplifier.
8. Do not block the spindle amplifier's intake/outtake ports. Failure to observe this could result in
faults.
9. The spindle amplifier is a precision device. Do not drop it or apply strong impacts.
10. Do not install or operate a spindle amplifier that is damaged or missing parts.
11. Consult with the Service Center or Service Station when storing the spindle amplifier for a
long time.
(1) Each unit is designed to be installed in a cabinet such as a power distribution box. Avoid installation
in direct sunlight, near heat generating objects or outdoors.
(2) The inner working environment (temperature, humidity, vibration, atmosphere) of the cabinet must
be within the limits given in the "Specifications for each unit". The cabinet for the cutting machine
must be a totally closed type cabinet.
(3) Make considerations so that inspections and replacement during maintenance is easy.
The space required around each unit's panel is shown in the outline dimension drawings.
(4) Each unit generates some heat, so leave a space on the top and bottom when installing other
equipment or parts.
Refer to the outline drawing for the square hole dimensions. In this case, insert packing between
the unit and power distribution box. Refer to the following installation examples for installing each
unit.
40
160
Power distribution
box
Power distribution Cover
box
40
Outtake
40
Partition
40
Filter
Front Rear Intake
Example 1. Leave space for air flow when the power Example 2. When the outdoor air cooling section is to
distribution box is at the rear of the protrude from the power distribution box,
machine. make sure that cutting chips, etc., do not
enter the outtake section.
I-7
CAUTION
1. Do not hold the front cover when transporting the spindle amplifier. The amplifier could drop
and cause injury.
2. Always observe the installation direction. Failure to do so could result in faults.
3. Provide the specified distance between the spindle amplifier and inner surface of the control
panel and between other devices. Failure to do so could result in faults.
Note 1. When installing in a poor environment (factory with high levels of oil mist), install a filter at the
intake section of the partition showed with the dashed line in Example 2 above.
Note 2. Make sure that cutting chips from the drill, etc., do not enter the spindle amplifier when
assembling the control panel.
Note 3. Provide means so that oil, water and cutting chips, etc., do not enter the spindle amplifier from
the control panel clearances or the ceiling fan.
Note 4. When using the product in a place with high levels of harmful gases or dust, protect the
spindle amplifier with air purging (feed in clean air from outside so that the pressure in the
storage panel is higher than outside to prevent the entry of harmful gases or dust).
(5) Installation of cooling fan

Each unit (excluding types without fins) is
individually provided with a cooling fan
(FAN1 shown below). However, when
using the totally closed type unit Inside box Outside box
installation method and the box structure
in which cutting oil and dust, etc., easily Wind
enters the unit's fan and fin section (a direction
structure where the fan may stop easily
due to the working environment), the user
should add a fan at the FAN2 position
FAN1 (mounted on unit as
shown on the right. Carry out forced standard)
cooling with the velocity set to 2m/sec or
more. Also take the serviceability into FAN2 (Additionally installed
consideration in this case. by user)
* Install a finger guard for
safety.
Due to the structure, heat will tend to accumulate on the top of each unit. Thus, install a fan in the
power distribution box to mix the heat at the top of each unit.
(Inside box)
Wind FAN3
direction (Additionally installed by user)
Velocity 2m/sec or higher
* Install a finger guard for safety.
Power supply
Spindle drive
Front view of units
I-8
4. Connection of Each Unit

CAUTION
1. Turn the spindle amplifier power OFF if the spindle amplifier fails. Fires could be caused if a
large current continues to flow.
2. Cut off the power with the error signal. The regenerative resistor could abnormally overheat
and ignite due to a fault in the regenerative transistor, etc.
3. Do not relay the cables connected to CN5 and 6 on the spindle drive unit with a terminal block
or connector, etc. Failure to observe this could result in malfunctions or faults.
5. Always connect the motor's ground to the terminal on the spindle drive unit with a
grounding wire. Directly connect the grounding for each unit to the grounding terminal on
each power distribution box. (Do not pass the grounding wire through each drive unit.) Failure
to observe this could result in spindle amplifier malfunctions or faults.
6. Always connect the external contactor for MDS-B/V1-CV-370/450/550. Do not share this
connector with other CVs as damage could occur.
Wire the power supply and main circuit as shown below. Always use a No fuse Breaker (NFB) on the
power supply input wire.
<Standard connection>
The control circuit power is provided by applying the 3-phase power supply on R, S and T.
After initializing for approx. one second, the machine ready input signal turns ON and enables operation.
If this signal turns OFF during spindle motor operation, the base interception will be carried out, and the
motor will coast (no load).
Wiring system
diagram Note 1. Starting with production in April 1995, a
MDS-B/C1-SPT MDS-B/C1-CV grounding bar has been attached to each
NC (PC) (Spindle drive) (Power supply) unit before shipment. Connect the
grounding wire as shown below, and do
CN1A
CN1B
CNS20
CN4
not tighten the grounding wires together.
For B/C1-SPT For B/C1-CV

CN9
CN4
CN9
CN6
U VW L1 L2 L3
L+
CN5
CN6
L-
L11 Note 2. If the unit may malfunction since
CN8
CN7
L21 devices (contactor, magnetic brakes,

relay) that generate high levels of
MC1 noise are installed near the power
supply unit and drive unit, install a
surge killer on the noise generating
U V W U WV device, so as to suppress the noise.
(Contactor) MC
(Magnetic
sensor)
A/BAL
(AC
reactor)
(Encoder)
(Spindle motor) T 3
S 200VAC
R 200 to 230VAC 60Hz
I-9
4.1 Layout of each unit

Layout the units according to the following reference as a principle.
(1) When installing one spindle drive
Spindle Power
drive supply
Link bar
(Front)
(2) When installing two spindle drives

(a) When the total spindle drive output is 37kW or less
Spindle Power Spindle

drive supply drive
Link bar
(Front)
(b) When the total spindle drive output exceeds 37kW
Spindle Power Spindle Power

drive supply drive supply
(1) (1) (2) (2)
(Front)
Link bar
(Note 1) Install each unit next to each other (vertical direction is not acceptable) with a 3cm or less
clearance between each unit.
Note that this does not apply to the spindle drives (2) and power supply units (1) shown in (b)
of section (2).
(Note 2) When using section (2) (b), install an ACL (A/B-AL) on each power supply unit.
4.2 Link bar specifications

The link bar is the following part, and must be manufactured by the user:
L+, L- A connection wire used to supply the converter's DC voltage from the power supply unit to
each drive unit.
L11, L21 A connection wire used to supply the 200VAC control power to each unit.
This does not necessary need to be a bar (plate), but can be a wire.
Link bar specifications

The terminal block for link bar connection is the following regardless of the capacity:
L+, L- M6 screw
L11, L21 M4 screw
I - 10
An outline connection diagram is shown below for reference.
(1) Outline connection drawing
SPT B/C1-CV
(Note) Mount the terminal cover after wiring
as shown on the left. The terminal
cover differs for each unit width. Refer
to section "8.3 Selection of wire size".
RO
SO
I - 11
4.3 Precautions for installing multiple power supply units

The methods for installing the two-axis spindles are explained here as an example for installing the
power supply unit.
NC(PC) MDS-B/C1-SPT(No.1) MDS-B/C1-CV(No.1) MDS-B/C1-SPT(No.2) MDS-A/B-CV(No.2)
C C
N N
1A 1A
1B 1B
9 9
5 C C 5 C C
6 6
7 N N 7 N N
8 8
4 4 4 4
MC1 MC1
L+, L- L+, L-
L11, L21 L11, L21
L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3
AC reactor (A/B-AL NO.1)

MC
200VAC
AC reactor
Contactor (A/B-AL NO.2)
NFB1
Fig. 1
1) Connecting the L+, L-, L11 and L21 link bars

Connect the L+ and L- link bars independently with A/B-CV (No. 1) and A/B-CV (No. 2) as shown
above. Make sure that both A/B-CV link bars are not short-circuited and connected.
Note that the L11 and L21 link bars can be connected together.
2) Connecting and selecting NFB1, contactor and AC reactor

The NFB1 and contactor can be shared as shown above. Note that when using the B-CV-370, the
rush circuit and contactor operation sequence differ, so the contactor must be installed
independently. (The contactor cannot be shared.) Damage will result if the contactor is omitted, or if
it shared with the other power supplies. The AC reactors must be installed separately for the
A/B-CV (No. 1) and (No. 2).
3) Connecting the MC1 terminal (A/B-CV)

When sharing the contactor as shown above, connect the terminal (MC1) for exciting the contactor
coil to one of the A/B-CV connections.
Set the A/B-CV rotary switch to which MC1 is connected to "0", and set the other switch to "1".
I - 12
4.4 Precautions when installing multiple spindle drive units to one power supply
unit
The methods for installing two spindle drive units to one power supply unit are explained here as an
example.
NC(PC) MDS-B/C1-SPT(No.1) MDS-A/B-CV MDS-B/C1-SPT(No.2)
C C
N N
1A C C 1A
C
1B 1B
9 N N 9
5 5 N
6 4 4 6
4
7 7
8 C 8
N
9 MC1
L+, L-
L11, L21
MC
200VAC
AC reactor
(A/B-AL) Contactor
NFB1
Fig. 2
1) Connecting B-CVE/C1-CV and B/C1-SPT

Connect B-CVE/C1-CV CN4 and B/C1-SPT (No. 1) CN4 to B-CVE/C1-CV CN9 and B/C1-SPT (No.
2) CN4. If B/C1-SPT for three or more axes is connected, leave CN4 for B/C1-SPT (No. 3) and
following open.
Note that the A/B-CV can be controlled (READY ON/OFF, alarm display, etc.) only with the spindle
drive unit connected to A/B-CV CN4.
2) Make sure that the machine ready input turns ON and OFF simultaneously for all spindle drive units.
Do not allow the signal to turn ON and OFF for only one spindle drive unit.
3) When turning the machine relay input OFF during an emergency stop, always output the zero
speed signal with all spindle drive units before turning the signal OFF.
4) If an alarm occurs in one of the spindle drive units, turn OFF the machine ready input OFF for all
spindle drive units.
5) When connecting three or more spindle drive units, install the large-capacity drive units on both
sides of the power supply unit.
I - 13
5. Connectioor
5. Connector and Cable Specifications
5.1 Half pitch connector and cable connection system
NC (PC) MDS-B/C1-SPT MDS-B/C1-CV
SH21 cable
CN4
CN1A CN4
9
7
8
Detector
Connector name
Cable Recommended connector Cable materials
on controller Cable creation tool (Maker)
name on cable side (Maker) (Maker)
side (Maker)
SH21 10220-L8A9VE Shell (Crimp type): 10320-3210-000 (3M) UL2789 AWG28 Press machine unit
cable (3M) Plug (Pressure welding type): (DDK) (with gage block) : 3794-1000
10120-6000EL (3M) 10PVV-SB Locator plate : 3795-1A
AWG2810P (3M) Platen : 3795-2A
Cutting unit : 3795-3A
Fixture unit : 3796-1A
Fixture block : 3796-3A
Cable clamp : 3796-4
CNP5 Same as above (1) Controller side TS-91026
cable Plug (soldered-type): 2P0.3SQ
10120-3000VE (3M) +10P0.2SQ
Shell (soldered-type): (DDK)
10320-52F0-008 (3M)
(2) Detector side

Connector:
AMP-350720-1
(AMP)
Pin:
AMP-350689-1
(AMP)
CNP6M Same as above (1) Controller side Same as above
cable Same as above
CNP6A (2) Detector side
cable (a) Magnetic sensor

TRC116-12A10-7F10.5
(Tajimi Musen)
(b) Encoder
MS3106A20-29S (Canon)
CN8A, Same as above (1) Controller side
10, 11, Same as above
12 cable
I - 14
5. Connectioor
5.2 Cable details
5.2.1 SH21 cable (Semi-ordered part) [For B/C1-CV B/C1-SPT connection]
Part No. Part name Model Maker

000
101 Connector (plastic shell) 10320-3210-000 3M
102 Cable 10PVV-SB AWG2810P (BK0-NC9072) 3M
103 Connector (plug) 10120-6000EL 3M
103 101 102 101

11 1
103
12 10
350 (Standard)
Fix shield onto Fix shield onto

connector case connector case
I - 15
5. Connectioor
5.2.2 Spindle control circuit cable list
Arranged
Arranged
Drive unit Connected device Connected device
side Cable Applicable cable finished state
by
by
No. Application Parts name Parts name
connection name
connector Maker Maker
Twisted pair batch shield cable Motor (connector)
Enclosed with motor

Semi ordered part
Motor temperature Spindle drive unit 0.2SQ Motor (lead wire
switch signal terminal)
CNP5 (Shell) Maximum diameter 11mm (Connector)
(1) CN5
Motor speed cable 10320-52F0-008 AMP-350720-1
detection signal (Plug) (Pin)
10120-3000VE AMP-350689-1
3M Japan Amplifier
Twisted pair batch shield cable Magnetic sensor
Enclosed with magnetic

Spindle drive unit
0.2SQ drive unit
Semi ordered part
sensor drive unit

(Shell)
Orientation Maximum diameter 11mm TRC116-12A0-7F
CNP6M 10320-52F0-008
(2) detection signal CN6
cable (Plug) 10.5
(Magnetic sensor) 10120-3000VE
3M Tajimi Musen
Twisted pair batch shield cable Encoder
Enclosed with encoder

Spindle drive unit 0.2SQ
Semi ordered part
(Shell)
Orientation Maximum diameter 11mm
CNP6A 10320-52F0-008 MS3106A20-29S
(3) detection signal CN6 (Plug)
(Encoder) cable
10120-3000VE
3M DDK
Spindle drive unit Batch vinyl shield cable NC (PC)

0.2SQ x 20-core
Toshiba Machine
(Connector)
ordered part
CN1 54306-2611 Maximum diameter 11mm

CN1A cable (Clamp)
(4) Communication 54331-0261
CN7 CN7
cable
MOLEX
Spindle drive unit Twisted pair shield cable NC (PC)

(Shell) 0.3SQ5
No ordered part
10320-52F0-008
Digital speed Maximum diameter 11mm
CN9A (Plug)
(5) command pulse CN9A 10120-3000VE
cable
feedback
3M
Twisted pair shield cable NC (PC)

Spindle drive unit 0.3SQ2 Speedometer
No ordered part
Load meter
(Shell) Maximum diameter 11mm
CN9A 10320-52F0-008
(6) Meter output CN9A
cable
(Plug)
10120-3000VE
3M
Twisted pair shield cable 0.3SQPersonal

Spindle drive unit computer RS232C
No ordered part
Personal Maximum diameter 11mm connector

computer for CN9B (Shell)
(7) CN9A
parameter input cable 10320-52F0-008

monitor (Plug)
10120-3000VE
3M
I - 16
5. Connectioor
(Note 1) The connector shell on the spindle drive unit is the 3M "10320-52F0-008", but this is a shell
with a one-touch locking mechanism that does not require screw locking. When ordering the
cables from Mitsubishi, this shell will be used.
However, if the cable is to be manufactured by the user, the shell "10320-52A0-008" (3M)
with the screw lock mechanism can be used instead of the above shell.
(Note 2) Keep the length of the cables, excluding the CN9B cable to 30m or less. (The CN9B cable
must be 3m or less.)
(Note 3) Do not relay the CNP5, CNP6M or CNP6A cables. Malfunctions could occur due to noise
from the motor drive wire or other cables. (Orientation position could dislocate, vibration could
occur, etc.)
If the cable must be relayed, keep the peeled shield section as short as possible (3cm or less),
and separate the cable from the other drive wires and cables. Mitsubishi will not be held liable
for any problems that should occur as a result of a relayed cable. The customer is responsible
for providing measures against noise.
I - 17
5. Connectioor
z (1) CNP5 cable z

Part No. Part name Abbr. Model Qty/type
000 E-type 2-type
101 Connector (shell) CON 10320-52F0-008 1 1
102 Connector (plug) CON 10120-3000VE 1 1
103
104 Cable SEN F-DPEVSB TS-91026 (DDK) 1 1
Connector CON 350720-1 1
105
(housing)
106 Connector (pin) CON 350689-1 8
Cable name
CNP5--
Connector type E: E-type (crimp terminal on lead end)
2: 2-type (designated connector)
Axis No. (Axis 1 to 8)1:1-axis
| |
System No. 8: 8-axis
None: 1-axis system
2: 2-axis system
P: PLC axis
Connection connector No.
Length L (L 30m)
2-type
(CN5) Amplifier connector E-type

Detector connector
Pin No. Pin No.
Green
White
Purple
White
Yellow
Brown
Red
Brown
Blue
Black
Fix ground plate to

connector case
I - 18
5. Connectioor
z (2) CNP6M cable z

000 E-type 2-type
101 Connector (shell) CON 10320-52F0-008 1 1
102 Connector (plug) CON 10120-3000VE 1 1
103
104 Cable SEN F-DPEVSB TS-91026 (DDK) 1 1
105 Connector CON TRC116-12A10-7F10.5 1
106
107
108
Cable name
CNP6M--
2: 2-type (designated connector)
Axis No. (Axis 1 to 8) 1:1-axis
| |
None: 1-axis system
Magnet sensor signal 2: 2-axis system
P: PLC axis
Connection connector No.
(CN6) Amplifier connector Detector connector

Pin No. Pin No.
Green
White
Blue
Brown
Purple
Brown
Fix ground plate to

connector case
Length L (L 30m)
2-type
E-type
I - 19
5. Connectioor
z (3) CNP6A cable z

000 E-type 2-type 3-type
101 Connector (shell) CON 10320-52F0-008 1 1 1
102 Connector (plug) CON 10120-3000VE 1 1 1
103
104 Cable SEN F-DPEVSB TS-91026 (DDK) 1 1 1
105 Cannon connector CON MS3108B20-29S 1
(angle)
106 Connector clamp CON MS3057-12A 1 1
107
108 Cannon connector CON MS3106B20-29S 1
(straight)
Cable name
CNP6A--
2: 2-type (cannon plug straight type)
3: 3-type (cannon plug L type)
Axis No. (Axis 1 to 8) 1:1-axis
| |
Encoder signal (1024P) None: 1-axis system
2: 2-axis system
Connection connector No. P: PLC axis
2-type
Length L (L 30m)
3-type
Key way position
E-type
(CN6) Amplifier connector Detector connector

Pin No.
Pin No.
Green
White
Purple
White
Yellow
Brown
Red
Brown
Purple
Brown
Blue
Black
Fix ground plate to

connector case
I - 20
5. Connectioor
5.2.3 Cable assembly procedure
(1) Non-shield shell assembly procedure I

One-touch locking type
(a) Peel the outer sheath so that the shield wires are
exposed.
Shield wire
(b) Wrap copper tape or vinyl tape around part of the

shield wire section.
Copper tape
(c) Fold the shield wire over the wrapped copper tape
or vinyl tape.
Folded shield wire
(d) Cut off any excess sheath.
Folded shield wire
(e) After connecting the connector and cable, mount

the cable clamp approx. 1 to 2mm from the cable
end, and tighten the screw until the cable clamp
screw section face contacts closely.
(Note) Adjust the No. of copper tape windings in
step (b) so that the shield wire and clamp
contact without looseness and so that the
clamp's screw section face is closely
Cable clamp with
grounding plate contacted.
I - 21
5. Connectioor
(f) Store a connector and latch at the respective

positions on one end of the shell.
Latch (The male of the shell is same shape as female's,
so store on either side.)
(Note) Make sure that the cable does not rise up or
exceed the shell's inner wall to prevent
breakage of the cable.
(g) Set the other shell and tighten with a screw.

(Note) Recommended screw tightening torque:
3kgfcm
(h) Completion
Confirmation items :
There is no clearance on the shell engaging
face.
The latch can be correctly opened and closed
when moved with a finger.
I - 22
5. Connectioor
(2) Non-shield shell assembly procedure II

Jack screw (screw locking) type
(a) Peel the outer sheath so that the shield wires are
exposed.
Shield wire
(b) Wrap copper tape or vinyl tape around part of the

shield wire section.
Copper tape
(c) Fold the shield wire over the wrapped copper tape
or vinyl tape.
Folded shield wire
(d) Cut off any excess sheath.
Folded shield wire
(e) After connecting the connector and cable, mount

the cable clamp approx. 1 to 2mm from the cable
end, and tighten the screw until the cable clamp
screw section face contacts closely.
(Note) Adjust the No. of copper tape windings in
step (b) so that the shield wire and clamp
contact without looseness and so that the
clamp's screw section face is closely
Cable clamp with contacted.
grounding plate
I - 23
5. Connectioor
(f) Store a connector and jack screw at the respective

Jack screw positions on one end of the shell.
(The male of the shell is same shape as female's,
so store on either side.)
(Note) Make sure that the cable does not rise up or
exceed the shell's inner wall to prevent
breakage of the cable.
(g) Set the other shell and tighten with a screw.

(Note) Recommended screw tightening torque:
3kgfcm
(h) Completion
Confirmation items :
There is no clearance on the shell engaging
face.
I - 24
6. Outline Drawing
6. Outline Drawing
6.1 List of outlines
Outline
(1) Unit type
2-5 screw 2-5 screw 4-5 screw
Square hole
Square hole
Square hole
(Front)
(Installation) (Installation) (Installation)
[Power supply unit] [Spindle drive unit]
Inside box Outside box Inside box Outside box

Regenerative resistor
Fin and fan
Fin and fan
Power Spindle
supply drive unit
unit
Maintenance
Maintenance area
area
(Side) (Side)
(Note) The type A0 unit shown in sections 2(2) and

(3) does not have the fins and fin section.
Power supply unit Spindle drive unit

Capa- 15 to 15 to
~ 7.5kW 11kW 22 to 37kW ~ 3.7kW 5.5 to 11kW 22 to 30kW
city 18.5kW 18.5kW
v 60 90 120 150 60 90 120 150
b 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360
c 52 82 112 142 52 82 112 142
d 342 342 342 342 342 342 342 342
I - 25
6. Outline Drawing
6.2 Power supply unit
Square hole
B/C1-CV-37
55 B/C1-CV-150
Unit width -8
75 B/C1-CV-10 185 2-M5 screw
Installation hole
dimensions
Terminal cover
2-6 2-6 2-6

hole hole hole
Wiring space
B/C1-CV-220
Square hole
260
300
B/C1-CV-370
4-M5 screw
Installation hole
dimensions
Terminal cover
4-6
hole
Wiring space
I - 26
6. Outline Drawing
6.3 Spindle drive unit

(Note) The front view drawing shows the state with the terminal cover removed.
Square hole
Unit width -8 2-M5 screw
Installation hole
dimensions
Terminal cover
2-6 2-6 2-6

hole hole hole
Wiring space
(Note) The front view drawing shows the state with the terminal cover removed.
Square hole
4-M5 screw
Installation hole
dimensions
Terminal cover
4-6
hole
Wiring space
I - 27
6. Outline Drawing
6.4 AC reactor
(1) Conventional product (production discontinued)
AC reactor outline drawing
(1) For 30kW or less
Y31
Y
6-M6 screw
Terminal 551 4-610 slot

cover 140
110
1652
ACL model Corresponding power supply unit Y3 Y Mass

A-AL BKO-NC6851H01 A-CV-37, A-CV-55, A-CV-75 82 130 3.6kg
A-AL BKO-NC6851H02 A-CV-110 75 120 3.0kg
A-AL BKO-NC6851H03 A-CV-150, A-CV-185 105 140 5.2kg
A-AL BKO-NC6851H04 A-CV-220, A-CV-260, A-CV-300 110 150 6.0kg
(2) European Standards compliant part

AC reactor outline drawing AC reactor outline drawing
(1) For 30kW or less (1) 37kW
MAIN MAIN
Y31
6-M6 screw L11 L21 6-M6 screw L11 L21 L31

Y31
L31
Y
Y
L12 L22 L32 L12 L22 L32

M5 screw DRIVE M5 screw DRIVE
FG connection FG connection
position position
(With ground mark) 551 (With ground mark) 701
PE connection 4-815 slot PE connection 4-815 slot
postiion postiion
Terminal cover Terminal cover
155
175
145
125
1652 2202
ACL model Corresponding power supply unit Y3 Y Mass Screw ACL model Corresponding power supply unit Y3 Y Mass
B-AL-7.5K B/C1-CV-37,B/C1-CV-55,B/C1-CV-75 82 130 3.6kg B-AL-37K B/C1-CV-370 110 150 10.0kg
M5
B-AL-11K B/C1-CV-110 75 130 3.0kg
B-AL-18.5K B/C1-CV-150, B/C1-CV-185 105 140 5.2kg
M6
B-AL-30K B/C1-CV-220,B/C1-CV-260,B/C1-CV-300 110 150 6.0kg
I - 28
6. Outline Drawing
(Note 1) This AC reactor has a PE (protection grounding) terminal for electric shock prevention and an
FG (function grounding) terminal for noise measures. Observe the following cautions for
treating each terminal.
(1) PE terminal ( )
(a) When AC reactor installation side is PE
Install the AC reactor unit with screws (bolts) in all four installation holes.
Always insert a loosening-prevention washer and spring washer in the screw (bolt)
used for the mark installation hole, and tighten the screw.
(b) When AC reactor installation side is not PE
Install the AC reactor unit with screws (bolts) in all four installation holes.
Always insert a loosening-prevention washer and spring washer and tighten the
screw together with the grounding wire (PE) crimp terminal at the mark
installation hole.
The grounding wire used is the same type as the grounding wire connected to the
power supply unit.
(2) FG terminal (FG)
Screw the function grounding wire crimp terminal at the terminal marked as "FG" on the
top of the AC reactor (terminal block).
(With this treatment, the built-in filter's grounding will be directly connected to the
grounding, and the noise withstand level will be improved.)
Function grounding wire: This is a grounding wire not used for protection grounding.
Thus, do not use a green/yellow spiral wire.
(Note 2) The dimensions of the terminal

cover are as shown on the right.
When separately manufacturing
a cover, refer to the dimensions
on the right.
6.5 Contactor
Refer to the section "8.4 Selection of AC reactor, contactor and NFB".
6.6 NFB
Refer to the section "8.4 Selection of AC reactor, contactor and NFB".
I - 29
7. Heating Value
7. Heating Value
1) Power supply unit (MDA-B/C1-CV) 2) Spindle drive unit (MDS-B/C1-SPT)
Heating value (W) Heating value (W)
Model Model
B Series C1 Series B Series C1 Series
CV-37 55 55 SPT-04 - *30
CV-55 65 65 SPT-075 - *40
CV-75 80 80 SPT-15 - *50
CV-110 130 125 SPT-22 - 70
CV-150 160 155 SPT-37 - 80
CV-185 200 195 SPT-55 - 110
CV-220 220 210 SPT-75 - 140
CV-260 270 260 SPT-110 - 185
CV-300 330 320 SPT-150 - 240
CV-370 - 400 SPT-185 - 350
SPT-220 - 375
SPT-260 - 495
SPT-300 - 635
(Note 1) The heating value for the spindle drive unit is for during continuous rated output.
(Note 2) For the total heating value for the unit, add the heating value for the corresponding unit above
that is mounted on the actual machine.
Example 1) When mounted unit is B-CV-300, B/C1-SPT-150 2 units
Total unit heating value (W) = 380 + 250 + 250 = 830 (W)
Example 2) When mounted unit is B-CV-110, B-SPT-110
Total unit heating value (W) = 125 + 185 = 310 (W)
(Note 3) Use the following expression as a guide for the heating value outside the panel when using a
sealed installation.
(1) Power supply unit ... Heating value outside panel = (B-CV heating value - 17) 0.8,
(C1-CV heating value -15) 0.85
(2) Spindle drive unit ... Heating value outside panel = (B-SPT heating value - 20) 0.8,
(C1-SPT heating value -20) 0.85
Note that units in the above table indicated with an asterisk do not have fins, so this
expression does not apply. Only the heating value inside the panel applies in this case.
(Note 4) Due to the structure, heat will tend to accumulate that the top of each unit. Thus, install a fan
in the distribution box to mix the heat at the top of each unit.
(Inside box)
Wind FAN3 (Additionally installed by user)
direction
Velocity 2m/sec or more
* Install a finger guard for safety.
Power supply
Spindle drive
Front view of units

I - 30
8. Selection of Capacity
8.1 Selection of the power supply unit (MDS-B/C1-CV)
Select the power supply unit with the following reference.
1) When using the 1-axis spindle drive unit

Power supply unit capacity Spindle motor 30-minute rated output
2) When using two or more axis spindle drive units
Power supply unit capacity (Spindle motor 30-minute rated output)
(Note 1) (Spindle motor 30-minute rated output) is the total of the spindle motor 30-minute rating
(kW).
Thus, the motor output and spindle drive unit capacity will not always match so always
substitute the motor output in the above equations.
Furthermore, the motor output differs for the acceleration/deceleration and constant speeds,
so substitute the larger output.
(Note 2) The power supply capacity is the minimum line up capacity that establishes the above
equations.
Example) If the value obtained with the above equation is 13kW, select the 15kW capacity
(B/C1-CV-150) power supply unit.
(Note 3) When the power supply unit capacity is 18.5kW or less, if the value obtained on the right of
the above equation is within 0.5kW or less compared to the power supply unit in the line up,
the excess amount can be ignored when selecting the power supply capacity.
In the same manner, if the power supply unit capacity is 22kW or more, an excess of 1kW or
less can be ignored.
Example 1) When value obtained on right of above equation is 15.5kW ... Power supply unit
capacity = 15kW (B/C1-CV-150)
capacity = 18.5kW (B/C1-CV-185)
(Note 4) If the value obtained on the right of the above equation exceeds 38kW, select the power
supply units with a combination that does not exceed this value.
Example) When using three axes and the spindle motor capacities are 26kW, 15kW and
7.5kW respectively:
Power supply unit (No. 1) capacity is 26kW, and connected spindle drive unit is for 26kW
motor
Power supply unit (No. 2) capacity is 22kW, and connected spindle drive unit is for 15kW and
7.5kW motors
8.2 Selection of the power supply capacity

The power supply capacity reference values corresponding to the capacity of the power supply unit
selected in section 8.1 are shown below.
Power supply
unit 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370
B/C1-CV
Power supply
capacity
7 9 12 17 23 28 33 37 44 54
reference
values (kVA)
I - 31
The actually required power supply capacity is calculated with the following equation based on the above
power supply capacity reference values.
Power supply Right value (kW) obtained in equation in section 8.1 Power supply capacity
= reference value (KVA)
capacity (kVA) Power supply unit capacity (kW) selected from section 8.1
When using multiple power supply units, the total of the power supply capacity for each power supply
unit obtained with the above equation will be the total power supply capacity.
Example) When the right value obtained in section 8.1 is 13kW:
The A/B-CV-150 power supply unit is selected, so the power supply capacity reference
value (kVA) is 23.
Thus, based on the above equation, the power supply capacity (kVA) is (13/15) 23 = 19.9
(kVA).
8.3 Selection of wire size

(1) Recommended power lead-in wire size (Select the size of the grounding wire on the power
supply lead-in side with the same reference.)
The wire is selected based on the power supply unit capacity as shown below regardless of the
motor type.
Power supply
unit 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370
B/C1-CV
Recommended IV3.5SQ IV3.5SQ IV14SQ IV22SQ IV30SQ IV38SQ IV50SQ IV60SQ
HIV5.5
power lead-in or or or or or or or or HIV50SQ
SQ
wire size HIV2SQ HIV3.5SQ HIV14SQ HIV14SQ HIV22SQ HIV30SQ HIV38SQ HIV38SQ
(2) Recommended wire size for spindle motor output wire (Select the size of the grounding wire on
the spindle motor side with the same reference.)
The wire is selected based on the spindle drive unit capacity as shown below regardless of the
motor type.
Spindle drive unit C1-SPT-04 C1-SPT-075 C1-SPT-15 C1-SPT-22 C1-SPT-37 C1-SPT-55 C1-SPT-75
Recommended
wire size for IV2SQ IV2SQ IV3.5SQ IV3.5SQ IV3.5SQ IV3.5SQ IV5.5SQ
spindle motor or HIV2SQ or HIV2SQ or HIV2SQ or HIV2SQ or HIV2SQ or HIV2SQ or HIV3.5SQ
output wire
C1-SPT-110 C1-SPT-150 C1-SPT-185 C1-SPT-220 C1-SPT-260 C1-SPT-300

IV8SQ IV14SQ IV22SQ IV30SQ IV38SQ IV60SQ
or HIV5.5SQ or HIV14SQ or HIV14SQ or HIV22SQ or HIV30SQ or HIV38SQ
(Note) The wire sizes recommended in (1) to (2) above are selected with conditions of an ambient
temperature of 30C and wiring three same tubes.
During actual use, select the wire based on the above reference while considering the ambient
temperature, wire material, and wiring state.
(3) Wire size for L11, L21 link bar

Regardless of the power supply unit and spindle drive unit capacity, the wire size must be IV2SQ or
more. The wire between NFB L11 and L21 must also be IV2SQ or more.
I - 32
(4) Wire size for L+, L link bar

[Selection method 1]
To unify the L+ and L link bar size:
In this case, select the following size or larger for the L+ and L link bars connected to the same
power supply unit based on the power supply unit capacity.
Power supply
unit 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370
B/C1-CV
Recommended IV5.5SQ IV14SQ IV22SQ IV22SQ IV38SQ IV60SQ IV60SQ
IV3.5SQ IV3.5SQ IV14SQ
wire size for L+ or or or or or or or
or HIV2SQ or HIV2SQ or HIV8SQ
and L link bar HIV3.5SQ HIV14SQ HIV14SQ HIV14SQ HIV22SQ HIV38SQ HIV50SQ
[Selection method 2]
To suppress the L+ and L link bar size to the minimum required for each unit:
In this case, select as shown below based on the current value that actually flows to the link bar.
In this section, the case when three spindle drive units are connected to one power supply unit is
explained. The same selection methods apply in all other cases.
MDS-B/C1-SPT(No.1) MDS-B/C1-SPT(No.2) MDS-B/C1-CV MDS-B/C1-SPT (No.3)
L+, L Link bar
Bar1 Bar2 Bar3
I1 I2 I3
(a) If the current which flows through the L+ and L- bus bars of each drive unit is 11 to 13 as shown
above, the current that flows through each link bar (Bar1 to Bar3) is as follows:
I (Bar 1) = I1
I (Bar 2) = I1 + I2
I (Bar 3) = I3
Thus, the wire for each L+, L link bar should tolerate the above current as a minimum.
(b) The I1 to I3 values are actually obtained with the following equation:
(I1 to I4) = Motor output current 1.1
Here, the motor output current in the above equation is the following value in correspondence
to the spindle drive unit.
Spindle drive unit
04 075 15 22 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300
MDS-B/C1-SPT-
Motor output current (A) 4 6 10 17 25 30 40 60 74 94 103 127 165
(c) Obtain I (Bar1) to I (Bar3) using the equations in the previous section based on I1 to I3
obtained with the above equation. Match that value against the following table, and select the
IV wire size.
Wire size Tolerable current
IV2SQ 27A
IV3.5SQ 37A
IV5.5SQ 49A
IV8SQ 61A
IV14SQ 88A
IV22SQ 115A
IV38SQ 162A
IV60SQ 217A Ambient temperature (30C or less)
I - 33
(d) A selection example is shown below.

Spindle drive unit Motor Motor output current
NO.1 B/C1-SPT-55 SJ-5.5A 30A
NO.2 B/C1-SPT-75 SJ-7.5A 40A
NO.3 B/C1-SPT-150 SJ-15A 74A
When
I1 = 30A 1.1 = 33A
I2 = 40A 1.1 = 44A
I3 = 74A 1.1 = 81.4A
Thus,
I (Bar1) = I1 = 33A
I (Bar2) = I1 + I2 = 77A
I (Bar3) = I3 = 81.4A
Therefore, the following is selected according to the table in (c):
Bar1 ....... IV3.5SQ
Bar2 ....... IV14SQ * In this case, the power supply unit
Bar3 ....... IV14SQ capacity is 5.5 + 7.5 + 15 = 28kW
according to the equation in section 8.1,
so select MDS-B/C1-CV-300.
(5) Drive unit connection screw size
The screw size for each unit is as follows.
MDS-B /C1-CV MDS-C1-SPT
Capacity (kW) ~ 7.5 11 15 to 18.5 22 to 37 ~ 3.7 5.5 to 11 15 to 18.5 22 to 30
Unit width 60 90 120 150 60 90 120 150
R, S, T, G M4 M5 M5 M8 - - - -
U, V, W, G - - - - M4 M5 M5 M8
P, N M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6
R0, S0 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4
MC1 M4 M4 M4 M4 - - - -
(6) Select the wire size as follows for EC Directives compliance. (The sizes are all mm2 units.)
The wire types are as follows.
PVC : Polyvinyl chloride
EPR : Ethylene polypropylene
SIR : Silicone rubber
(a) MDS-B/C1-CV (L1, L2, L3, PE)

Unit 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370
PVC 2.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70
Wire EPR 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 35 50
SIR 1.0 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 16 25 25
Terminal screw size M4 M5 M8
(b) MDS-C1-SPT (U, V, W, PE)

Unit 0.1 0.75 15 22 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300
PVC 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 70
Wire EPR 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50
SIR 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.5 4 6 10 10 16 25
Terminal screw size M4 M5 M8
(c) Wire size for L11 and L21 link bar

Regardless of the capacity, the wire size must be 1.5mm2 or more. (This also applies to the
wire between NFB-L11 and L21.)
I - 34
(d) Wire size for L+ and L link bar (for size unification)
Power supply unit
37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370
B/C1-CV-
PVC 2.5 2.5 6 10 16 25 35 50 70
Wire EPR 1.5 2.5 4 10 16 25 35 35 70 70
SIR 1.0 1.5 2.5 4 10 10 16 25 35 35
Terminal screw size M6
The above wire sizes follow EN60204 under the following conditions.
Ambient temperature: 40C
Wire installed on wall or open cable tray
When using under other conditions, refer to table 5 of EN60204 and Appendix C.
8.4 Selection of AC reactor, contactor and NFB

(a) Select the AC reactor, contactor and NFB from the following table when using only one power
supply unit.
Power supply
To 7.5kW 11kW 15 to 18.5kW 22 to 30kW 37kW
unit capacity
AC reactor B-AL-7.5K B-AL-11K B-AL-18.5K B-AL-30K B-AL-37K
(ordered part) (Mitsubishi Electric)
Refer to section "6. Outline
Drawing" for the dimensions.
Recommended S-N25-AC200V S-N35-AC200V S-N50-AC200V S-N80-AC200V S-N150-AC200V
contactor (Mitsubishi Electric)
(non-ordered Refer to section "6. Outline
part) Drawing" for the dimensions.
Recommended NF50CS3P-40A05 NF50CS3P-50A05 NF100CS3P- NF225CS3P- NF225CS3P-
NFB1 (Mitsubishi Electric) 100A05 150A05 175A05
(non-ordered Refer to section "6. Outline
part) Drawing" for the dimensions.
Recommended A NFB or CP (circuit protector) can be used as the breaker for the spindle motor fan.
NFB2 Select the NFB or CP by doubling the spindle motor fan rated current value as a guideline. Contact the NFB or CP
(non-ordered maker for the recommended wire size.
part)
Spindle
motor frame 71 90 112 132 160 180
size
Motor fan
0.1A 0.2A 0.2A 0.2A 0.6A 0.6A
rated current
A rush current that is approximately double the above rated current will flow when the fan is started.
(Note 1) The following applies to the above table:

Ordered parts refer to parts ordered by the user and shipped from Mitsubishi.
Non-ordered parts refer to parts not ordered, but arranged by the user.
(Note 2) Use the EN/IEC Standards compliant parts for the contactor and NFB to comply with the EC
Directives.
(b) The power supply unit input currents are shown below for reference.
Power supply
unit type 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370
B/C1-CV-
Input current
20 30 40 60 70 80 100 120 135 160
(A)
Always install one NFB, AC reactor and contactor for each power supply unit.
Note that the contactor can be omitted except for the B-CV-370 and larger capacities.
(Always install a contactor for the B-CV-370 and larger capacities.)
I - 35
[Reference for contactor selection]

Mitsubishi Electric contactor
AC operation AC electromagnetic contactor

AC Class 3 rated
Rated Support contact Dimensions (mm)
working current (A)
Name Model conductivity
200 to 380 to current (A) Standard Special A B C
220V 440V
Open type S-N10 11 7 20 1a 1b 43 78 78
Non-reversible S-N11 13 9 20 1a 1b 43 78 78
type 13 9
S-N12 20 1a1b 2a 53 78 78
S-N18 18 13 25 - - 43 79 81
S-N20 20 20 32 1a1b 2a 63 81 81
S-N21 20 20 32 2a2b - 63 81 81
S-N25 26 25 50 2a2b - 75 89 91
S-N35 35 32 60 2a2b - 75 89 91
S-N50 50 48 80 2a2b - 88 106 106
S-N65 65 65 100 2a2b - 88 106 106
S-N80 80 80 135 2a2b 4a4b 100 124 127
S-N95 100 93 150 2a2b 4a4b 100 124 127
S-N125 125 120 150 2a2b 4a4b 100 150 136
S-N150 150 150 200 2a2b 4a4b 120 160 145
S-N180 180 180 260 2a2b 4a4b 138 204 174
S-N220 220 220 260 2a2b 4a4b 138 204 174
S-N300 300 300 350 2a2b 4a4b 163 243 195
S-N400 400 400 450 2a2b 4a4b 163 243 195
S-N600 630 630(800) 660 2a2b 4a4b 290 310 234
S-N800 800 800(1000) 800 2a2b 4a4b 290 310 234
(Note 1) The values given in parentheses for each rated conductivity current apply when the working
ambient temperature is 40C or less.
S-N21 type
I - 36
[Reference for NFB selection]
NFB made by Mitsubishi Electric

Frame A 30 50 60 100 225 400 600 800
Model NF30-CB NF50-CS NF60-CS NF100-CS NF225-CS NF400-CS NF600-CS NF800-CS
Appearance
Rated current 40C for (10) (15) (Note 3)

(A) general use (20) (100) Adjustable
Reference 3 5 10 10 15 20 (50) 60 250 300
45C for (30) (40) 125 150 500 600 600
ambient temp. 15 20 30 30 40 50 75 100 350 400
general use (50) 175 700 800
60 (Note 2) 200 225
No. of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3
AC 250 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
Rated voltage V (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)
DC 250 250 250 250
250 250
JIS 550V 1.5 1.5 7.5 10 15 18 18
(sym) AC 460V 2.5 2.5 10 15 25 35 35
220V 2.5 5 5 25 25 35 50 50
IEC157-1
DC 250V 2.5 2.5 7.5 10 20 20
IEC 500V 2.5 2.5 7.5 10 15 18 18
Rated shut-off capacity (kA)
P1 415V 2.5 2.5 10 15 25 35 35

AC
(sya) 380V 5 5 18 18 25 35 35
240V 2.5 5 5 25 25 35 50 50
DC 250V 2.5 2.5 7.5 10 20 20
500V 2.5 2.5 10 15 25 35 35
NK AC
(sym) 250V 2.5 5 5 25 25 35 50 50
DC 250V 2.5 2.5 7.5 10
Dimensions (mm)
ca a 45 67.5 50 75 50 75 60 90 105 140 210 210

b 96 130 130 155 165 257 275 275
c 52 68 68 68 86 103 103 103
ca 67 86 86 86 110 132 155 155
Surface type
kg 0.25 0.35 0.45 0.65 0.45 0.65 0.85 1.1 2.0 2.5 5.0 5.8 9.5 10.9
product mass
Connection method
For crimp For crimp With bar With bar With bar
Surface type (F) For crimp For crimp For crimp
terminal terminal terminal terminal terminal
terminal terminal terminal
With barrier With barrier With barrier With barrier With barrier
Rear surface Page
82
type (B) Round stud Round stud Round stud Bar stud Bar stud Bar stud Bar stud
Inlaid type (FP)
Insertion type

(PM)
I - 37
[Reference for NFB selection]
NFB made by Mitsubishi Electric

Frame A 30 50 60 100 225 400 600 800
Model NF30-CB NF50-CS NF60-CS NF100-CS NF225-CS NF400-CS NF600-CS NF800-CS
Alarm switch

(AL)
Auxiliary switch

(AX)
92
Voltage trip

device (SHT)
Undervoltage trip

With accessory devices
device (UVT)
Electrically (Spring (Spring (Spring
controlled type 118 (Sole-
(Solenoid) charge) charge) charge)
(NFM) noid)
Machine mover
109
(MI)
Lead terminal
97
block (LT)
Closed type

(S)
In box
Dust-proof 106
type (I)
Water-proof

type (W)
Handle lock
device (Note 4) 116 (LC) (HL) (LC) (HL) (LC) (HL) (LC) (HL) (LC) (HL) (HL) (HL)
(HL) (LC)
F
Operation 98 (F20) (F40) (F60) (F60)
type (F032P) (F03) (F032P) (F03) (F102P) (F10)
handle
(TOTTE) S (S03) (S03) (S10)
102 (S20) (42SS) (S41) (60SS) (S40) (61SS) (S40) (61SS)
Optional parts
type (142SS) (142SS) (141SS)
Terminal cover (TC-L) (TC-L) (TC-L) (TC-L) (TC-L) (TC-L) (TC-L)

110 (TC-L)
(TC-L, S) (BTC) (TC-S) (BTC) (TC-S) (BTC) (TC-S) (BTC) (TC-S) (BTC) (BTC) (BTC) (BTC)
(TC-S)
Rear surface
84
stud (B-ST)
Inlaid installa-
84
tion flame
Insert terminal
85
block
Electrical part type

approval ( certified)
Classification * Acquired
*
Society In application
* NK, AB, LR
(Excluding * * *
approval GL
AB)
(NK, LR, BY, AB, CL)
Heat - Electronic
Overcurrent trip method Fully electromagnetic Heat - electromagnetic adjustable type
electromagnetic (adjustable)
With trip button Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
(Note) (1) Designate when using for DC applications.

(2) 50A and smaller has the same structure as NF50-CS.
(3) The rated current 100A for NF225-CS indicates the breaking capacity when the rated voltage
is 380VAC or more (JIS, IEC).
(4) Prepare HL in combination with the main unit.
I - 38
II. MDS-B/C1-CV
Power Regeneration Type
Power Supply Section
1. Power Supply Unit

1.1 Model configuration
Model configuration of power supply unit
MDS-B/C1-CV -
Power supply capacity class symbol

Symbol Capacity
37 3.7kW
55 5.5kW
75 7.5kW
110 11.0kW
150 15.0kW
185 18.5kW
220 22.0kW
260 26.0kW
300 30.0kW
370 37.0kW
Specifications
None : Standard specifications
S : Special specifications
Note 1) The model indication MDS-B/C1-CV in this section indicates both the standard specifications
(MDS-B/C1-CV) and the special specifications (MDS-B/C1-CVS).
WARNING
Do not omit the external contactor when using the MDS-B/C1-CV-370 or larger capacity. Failure
to install one could result in damage.
II - 1
1.2 List of specifications
Power supply unit model (B/C1-CV-)
Unit 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370
Output voltage 270V
Main circuit
Converter with regenerative circuit (IPM incorporated)
method
Tolerable ambient
C 0 to 55C
temperature
Tolerable ambient
% 99% or less (with no dew condensation)
relative humidity
Storage
C 15C to 70C
temperature
Storage relative
% 99% or less (with no dew condensation)
humidity
Atmosphere No harmful gases or dust
Tolerable vibration G 1G
Tolerable impact G 5G (acceleration)
Maximum heating
W 55 65 80 130 160 200 220 270 330 420
value
Mass kg 5.0 5.0 5.0 8.5 10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5
Capacity kW 3.7 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 26.0 30.0 37.0
Tolerable power +10%

V 200/200 to 230V 50/60Hz3Hz
voltage -15%
dB
Noise 55dB or less
(A)
II - 2
1.3 Hardware and parameter setting
(1) Hardware settings
Set the rotary switch (SW1) as shown below.

SW1
B/C1-CV specifications
setting
During operation with External
0 contactor (deposits are emergency stop
detected)
During operation with no
1 When not used
contactor
2
Setting prohibited
3
During operation with External

4 contactor (deposits are emergency stop
detected)
During operation with no
5 When used
contactor
9
Charge lamp
10
Setting prohibited
11
12
13
14
15
Open the cover (right side of LED status indication

window) on the upper front of the MDS-B/C1-CV power
supply unit, and turn the rotary switch to set the
presence of the external contactor.
In the example on the left, a contactor is present.
Note that the external contactor cannot be omitted for
the MDS-B/C1-CV-370. Thus, SW1 cannot be set to "1"
or "5".
II - 3
1.4 Status display
WARNING
1. Do not touch the switches with wet hands. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
2. Do not operate the unit with the front cover removed. The high voltage terminals and charged
sections will be exposed, and can cause electric shocks.
3. Do not open the front cover while the power is ON or during operation. Failure to observe this
could lead to electric shocks.
CAUTION
1. Check and adjust each parameter before starting operation. Failure to do so could lead to
unforeseen operation of the machine.
2. The spindle amplifier cooling fins, regenerative resistor and spindle motor, etc., will be hot
1.4.1 7-segment LED display
(1) Power ON
?
Initializing
Ready OFF
Ready ON, servo OFF
Servo ON
(2) Display during alarm (example shows overvoltage alarm)
The alarm No. flickers

Alarm No. Not lit
(3) Display during warning

(This example shows the occurrence of the instantaneous power failure warning)
The warning No. flickers

Warning No. Not lit
(4) Watch dog alarm
1.4.2 Charge lamp

This lamp turns ON when the rectified voltage across P-N is charged over a set level. Always confirm
that the charge lamp is not lit, and using a tester, confirm that the voltage has been discharged before
starting maintenance work such as replacing the unit.
II - 4
1.5 List of alarms and warnings
CAUTION
To reset the alarm, remove the cause, confirm that the run signal is not input and ensure the
surrounding safety. Then, turn the power ON/OFF or turn the alarm reset signal ON/OFF to
resume operation.
If an alarm occurs in the spindle amplifier, the base interception will be carried out and the motor will
coast to a stop. To prevent fires, etc., set a sequence that cuts off the input power with an external
sequence.
(1) Alarm
LED Mo- Re-
Alarm No. Name Meaning
display tion lease
Power module An overcurrent (Ic) was detected in the
61 a PR
overcurrent power module (IPM).
Auxiliary The auxiliary regenerative transistor is still
63 a PR
regeneration error ON.
The rush resistance short-circuit relay has
65 Rush relay error a PR
not turned ON.
One of the input power phases (R, S, T) is
67 Open phase a PR
open.
The power supply software process did not
68 Watch dog a AR
complete within the set time.
There is a ground fault in the motor. This is
69 Ground fault a PR
detected only at READY ON.
External contactor The externally installed contactor turned ON
6A a PR
melt even during READY OFF.
The rush resistance short-circuit relay is still
6B Rush relay melting a PR
ON.
The main circuit capacitor charging
6C Main circuit error a PR
operation is not normal.
6E Memory error An error occurred in the memory circuit. a AR
A/D converter error An A/D converter error or power supply error
6F a AR
Power supply error was detected.
The external contactor turned OFF even
71 Instantaneous stop during READY ON. An instantaneous power a PR
stop occurred for 55ms or more.
*1 73 The regeneration performance limit of the PR
Over-regeneration a
power supply was exceeded. (Note)
The voltage between L+ and L exceeded
75 Overvoltage a PR
410V.
*1 External
The rotary switch setting and parameter
76 emergency stop a AR
(PTYP) setting do not match.
setting error
Power module Overheating of the power module (IPM) was
77 a PR
overheat detected.
(Note 1) With alarm "73", to prevent immediately resumption of operation from the over-regeneration
state, the alarm cannot be released unless the control power (L11, L12) continuity state has
continued for 15 minutes or more after the alarm has occurred. The alarm cannot be released
even if the NC power or control power is turned ON immediately after the alarm occurs. If the
power is turned ON immediately after the alarm occurred, wait 15 minutes or more in the
continuity state, and then turn the power ON again.
II - 5
(2) Warning
LED Mo- Re-
Alarm No. Name Meaning
display tion lease
Auxiliary Regeneration at the limit of the power
E8 o regeneration supply's regeneration capacity is occurring b
frequency over frequently.
An instantaneous power stop occurred for
Instantaneous stop
E9 p 25ms or more. (As the main circuit voltage b
warning
has not dropped, an alarm has not occurred.)
External The external emergency stop input signal
EA q emergency stop was input. (24V is not applied on the CN23 b
*1 input connector.)
Over-regeneration 80% of the over-regeneration alarm level
EB r b
warning was reached.
*1 These alarms and warnings have been added from the MDS-B Series.
Note 2) The alarm No. in the above table indicates the alarm No. displayed on the spindle drive unit's
LED, and the LED display indicates the alarm No. displayed on the power supply unit.
Note 3) The spindle drive unit operation and resetting methods are as follow when the above alarms
or warnings occur.
[Operation] a: The spindle drive unit is carried out base interception, the external contactor
turns OFF, and the spindle motor coasts to a stop.
b: Only a warning is displayed. Operation continues.
[Resetting methods]
AR : Turn the spindle drive unit and power supply power OFF once.
PR : Turn the spindle drive unit reset input signal ON and OFF.
: Operation is automatically resumed after the warning is reset.
II - 6
1.6 Explanation of connectors and terminal block

A connector for connecting the CN23 external emergency stop has been added to the MDS-B Series.
Name Application Remarks
CN4 For connection of spindle drive unit When connecting only one
(CH1) spindle drive unit, always
CN9 For connection of spindle drive unit connect to the CN4 side.
Connector
(CH2)
CN23 For connection of the external Added with MDS-B.
emergency stop
P Converter voltage output (+)
TE2
N Converter voltage output ()
R0 200VAC single phase input
S0
Terminal TE3
MC1 For externally installed contactor
block relay control
R
S 3-phase input power 200/220VAC
TE4
T
G Ground
II - 7
1.7 Functions added with MDS-B Series

(Power supply external emergency stop function)
(1) Outline
In addition to the emergency stop signal using the NC bus line, an emergency stop signal isolated
from the outside has been added to provide double protection. The specifications are the same as
the A Series even when this function is not used.
(2) Details of detection

(a) Setting
When using the external emergency stop, the protection setting must be validated with the
rotary switch on the front of the MDS-B-CV and the parameter (PTYP) of the connected drive
unit.
Rotary switch : External contactor valid....... Set to 4
External contactor invalid.... Set to 5
Parameter (PTYP) : Add 0040 to the currently set value.
(Example)
Current Setting value
0008 0048
0030 0070
Note) If either of the settings are not made, an "external emergency stop setting error" will
occur.
(b) Detection details

If the external emergency stop input is detected continuously for 200ms or more, this function
will start.
If the contactor OFF command from the NC is not received within 30 seconds after the external
emergency stop input is detected, the CV itself will turn the contactor OFF.
(c) Alarm (Warning) list

CV
View A display Connected drive
Alarm/warning details
(flicker) unit display
m 76 External emergency stop setting error
Emergency stop state is applied from NC when
q EA
external emergency stop input is input.
When emergency stop from NC is not applied even
q 6F
when the external emergency stop is input
II - 8
(3) Connection
Emergency stop input
The left drawing shows an

example of the
emergency stop input.
* The current that flows when the contact is

ON is 15mA.
Make sure not to mistake the polarity.
(This function will not work if the 24VDC
polarity is mistaken.)
(4) Connector name

Part No. Name Type Maker
101 Connector 2-178288-3 AMP
102 Contact 1-175218-2 AMP
Wire size: 0.5 to 1.25SQ
24VDC
Drive unit side
II - 9
1.8 Main circuit connection
WARNING
Provide Class 3 or higher grounding for the spindle amplifier and spindle motor.
CAUTION
1. Correctly connect the spindle amplifier and spindle motor power phase order (U, V, W).
Failure to do so could result in abnormal operation of the spindle motor.
2. Apply only the designated voltage on each terminal. Failure to observe this could result in
ruptures or faults.
Spindle drive unit Power supply unit

MDS-A/B-SPA MDS-A/B-CV
Cabinet
grounding
Cabinet
grounding
Contactor
Motor
AC reactor
200/230VAC
50/60Hz
II - 10
* Starting with production in April 1995, a grounding bar has been attached to each unit before shipment.
Wire as shown below, and do not tighten the grounding wires together.
Cabinet grounding Cabinet grounding

Spindle drive unit side Power supply unit side
Precautions for connections

(1) The wires and crimp terminals will differ according to the capacity.
(Refer to "8.3" in the Chapter I MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle System Configuration Section.)
(2) A 200V class power supply is used.
The main circuit section does not have a transformer so always ground it.
(3) The phase order of the power supply terminals L1, L2, L3 is random.
(4) Refer to "8.4" in the Spindle System Configuration Section for the selection of the contactor, AC
reactor and Circuit Breaker connected to the power supply.
(5) Connect the specified power supply to the amplifier's power supply terminal (L1, L2, L3). If the
power voltage is not as specified, use a transformer to adjust to within the specifications.
(6) Do not connect the power wires (L1, L2, L3) to the spindle motor output terminals (U, V, W).
(7) Confirm that the spindle motor output terminal (U, V, W) and spindle motor terminal (U, V, W) phase
order matches.
(8) Do not connect a commercial power supply directly to the spindle motor.
(9) Check once again that the wires are connected correctly as indicated in the connection diagram.
II - 11
III. MDS-B/C1-SPT
Spindle Drive Unit System Section
2. Specifications
1. Model, Configuration and Connection

1.1 Model configuration
SJ 5.5 SJ
Name for Motor type Basic speed Special specification M : With

AC spindle None: A : 1500r/min H : High-speed type Z-phase
motor series Mid-large B : 1150r/min Z : Special max. speed
capacity L : 5000r/min W : Wide range
Motor N : Small X : Special constant output
capacity speed
V : Small sized
mid-large
capacity
15 min. (or 30 min.) rated output
capacity (kW)
(Note) Refer to the separate Built-in Motor Standard Specifications (BFN-14118-04) for details on the
built-in motor models.
MDS-B/C1-SPT
None : Standard
type : Slim type
TOSNUC corresponding Output capacity
to AC spindle inverter (1) When between 0.1kW or more and less than
(Spindle drive unit) 1kW
0
0.01kW will be 1.
(Leave blank when 0.)
Control-
ler 0.1kW will be 1.
(Example) For 0.4kW 04

For 0.75kW 075
(2) When 1kW or more

0.1kW will be 1.
(Example) For 3.7kW 37

For 30kW 300
III - 1
2. Specifications
1.2 Configuration
1.2.1 Basic configuration (No additional specifications)

MDS-B/C1-SPT
CN1A
Connect with NC Terminator Motor build-in
PLG encoder
CN9 Motor thermoswitch
For coil changeover MC CN4
To check pin card Connect with CV
CN5 CN6
Connect with NC
CN7 CN8
Connect with NC
U V W
1.2.2 With orientation function

(1) Magnetic sensor orientation (1-point) specifications
MDS-B/C1-SPT
CN1A
Connect with NC Terminator
PLG
CN9
CN4
For coil changeover MC
CN5 CN6
Connect with NC Magnet

CN7 CN8
Connect with NC
U V W Detector Sensor
Magnet sensor
(2) Encoder orientation (4096-point) specifications
MDS-B/C1-SPT
CN1A
Connect with NC Terminator
PLG
CN9
CN4
CN5 CN6
Connect with NC
CN7 CN8 Encoder for
Connect with NC ENC orientation
1024p/rev
U V W
III - 2
2. Specifications
(3) Z-phase motor built-in encoder orientation (4096-point) specifications
MDS-B/C1-SPT
CN1A
Connect with NC Terminator Z-phase motor
PLG built-in encoder
CN9
CN4
Connect with CV Motor temperature
To check pin card
switch
CN5 CN6
Connect with NC
CN7 CN8
Connect with NC
U V W
III - 3
2. Specifications
1.3 Device-to-device connections

NFB2 Connector wiring
CN1A CN1B
NFB1 A-AL
CN9 CN4
T(1,3) L3 TYPE
T(1,2) L2 MDS-B/C1-CV-
T(1,1)
CN5 CN6
L1
Contactor
CN4
MC1 CN7
Connector case 1 to 20 CN8
L11 L21 L+ L
CN4
BU
L11 L21 L+ L- FM BLOWER
Connector case 1 to 20 BV
CNC GROUND
(PE) E
PNS1 U U
PNS2 TYPE V V INDUCTION

I.M
MDS-B/C1-SPT- W W
MOTOR
CN20 CN1A
EMG+ 11 7 CN5
EMG- 9
13 17 (GND) 1
6
ALARM+ 17 3 (N15) 15
AG 5
ALARM- 19 13 (PZ) 8
8 PLG
HTD+ 18 2 (N15) 5 PULSE
1 SIGNAL
HTD- 20 12 (PA) 6 GENERATOR
2
HRD+ 22 4 (RA) 16
3
HRD 24 14 (PB) 7
4
(RB) 17
CN7 Connector case
ANS+ 2 7 OHS1
(MOH) 3
ANS- 4 17 OHS2 THERMAL
(RG) 13 PROTECTOR
REQ+ 3 6
REQ- 5 16
RG
GND 26 1
CN6
11,15
FG 14 (P.S) 10 19,20 H
CN1B (GND) 1, 11 15 K
1 (MA) 2 A
DG ORIENT
Terminator (MA*) 12 N ROTARY
(A-TM)
(MB) 3 C ENCORDER
20
(MB*) 13 R
CN9
(MZ) 4 B
D/A output 1/speedometer L11(GND)
10V max. speed (MZ*) 14 P
9
Connector case
D/A output 2/load meter AG
19
10V 120% torque
Coil changeover CN6
8
output signal RA
(MAG) 6 A
18
Spindle/C-axis RA
changeover signal (MAGR) 16 D
RG ORIENT
(LS) 7 F MAGNETIC
PNS2 (LSR)17 17
RG
E SENSER
CN6 CN8 (P15) 5 C
(GND) 15 B
AH 11 2
Connector case
AL 12 12 AG
BH 13 3 CN7
BL 14 13
(P.S) 10 19,20 H
ZH 9 4
(GND) 1, 11 15 K
ZL 10 14
(MA) 2 F
DG C-AXIS
DAT+ 7 5 (MA*) 12 L ENCORDER
DAT- 8 15
(MB) 3 G
FG 15
(MB*) 13 M
(MZ) 4 S
(MZ*) 14 T
Connector case
III - 4
2. Specifications
2. Specifications
2.1 AC spindle motor and controller specifications
(Note 1) The rated output is guaranteed with the power supply unit's rated input voltage
(200/220/230VAC). The rated output may not be achieved if the input voltage fluctuates and
drops this level.
(Note 2) Contact Mitsubishi when a rated output range other than 1:8, or 1:12 is required.
(Note 3) The 50% ED rating is ON for five minutes and OFF for five minutes in the 10 minute cycle time.
(Note 4) Refer to section I and II for details on the drive units power capacity, total heating value, rated
power voltage and mass.
(Note 5) Refer to the separate Built-in Motor Standard Specifications (BFN-14118-04) for details on
the built-in motor.
Series
Base speed 1500rpm Series
Item
SJ-
Model
5.5A 7.5A 11AP 11A 15A 18.5A 22AP 22A 26A 30A
Cont. rating (HP)/(kW) 5/3.7 7/5.5 9/7 10/7.5 15/11 20/15 20/15 25/18.5 30/22 30/22
capacity
Output
30 min. rating
(HP)/(kW) 7/5.5 10/7.5 15/11 15/11 20/15 25/18.5 30/22 30/22 35/26 40/30
50% ED rating
Speed
Basic speed (rpm) 1500

Max. speed (rpm) 8000 6000 4500
Frame No. A112 B112 B132 C132 A160 B160
Cont. rated torque
AC spindle motor
2.4 3.57 4.54 4.87 7.15 9.74 9.74 12.0 14.3

(kgm)
2 2
GD (kgm ) 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.17 0.21 0.27 0.32 0.55 0.69
Mass (kg) 60 70 75 100 110 130 150 175 200
Tolerable radial load (kg) 150 200 300
Cooling fan capacity (W) 35 130
Vibration V5 V10
Noise (dB) [A] 75 80
Installation Horizontal or vertical (output shaft down)
Overload withstand level 120% of 30-minute rated output for 1 minute or less
Ambient temperature (C) 0 to 40
Insulation class F class
Paint color Munsell 5.27G 2.46/0.21
Accessories Pulse generator and overheat detector
Bearing lubrication method Grease
Output characteristics drawing Fig.1 Fig.2 Fig.3
Series
MDS-B/C1-SPT-
Item
Model 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300
Compatible power supply unit MDS-B/C1-CV
model 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300
Main circuit IGBT IPM sinusoidal wave PWM inverter
Control circuit Pulse generator speed feedback, digital closed-loop control, vector control
Drive unit
Braking Power regeneration type

Speed control range (rpm) 35 to 8000 35 to 6000 35 to 4500
Speed fluctuation rate Max. 0.2% of maximum speed (under load varying from 10% to 100%)
Speed command Analog command 10V (or +10V) max. (Input impedance approx. 10K)
Ambient temperature/humidity 0C to 55C / 90%RH or less (with no dew condensation)
To be free from detrimental gas and dust
Atmosphere
(to conform with "grade C" environmental resistance specified by JEM1103)
Vibration 1G or less
Compliant standards IEC
III - 5
2. Specifications
Series
Wide (1 : 8) rated output Series Wide (1 : 12) rated output Series
Item
SJ-
Model
5.5XW8 7.5XW8 11XW8 15XW8 18.5XW8 5.5XWC 7.5XWC 11XWC 15XWC
Speed Output capacity
Cont. rating
5/3.7 7/5.5 10/7.5 15/11 20/15 5/3.7 7/5.5 10/7.5 15/11
(HP)/(kW)
30 min. rating
(HP)/(kW) 7/5.5 10/7.5 15/11 20/15 25/18.5 7/5.5 10/7.5 15/11 20/15
50%ED
Basic speed (rpm) 750 625 500 400
Max. speed (rpm) 6000 5000 6000 4800
Frame No. B112 B132 C132 B160 B180 B132 A160 B180 A200
AC spindle motor
Cont. rated torque (kg-m) 4.80 7.14 9.74 17.1 23.3 7.20 13.4 18.3 26.8
2 2
GD (kg-m ) 0.12 0.21 0.32 0.69 1.36 0.21 0.55 1.26 2.19
Mass (kg) 75 110 150 200 300 110 175 300 390
Tolerable radial load (kg) 200 300 400 300 400 600
Cooling fan capacity (W) 35 130 35 180 360
Vibration V5 V10 V5 V10
Noise (dB)[A] 75 80 75 80 85
Output characteristics
Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7
drawing
Series
MDS-B/C1-SPT-
Item
Model 110 220 260 300 110 150 260 300
Compatible power supply MDS-B/C1-CV-
unit model 55 75 110 150 185 55 75 110 150
Drive unit
35 to
6000
Ambient
0C to 55C / 90%RH or less (with no dew condensation)
temperature/humidity
Atmosphere
III - 6
2. Specifications
Series
High-speed Series
Item
SJ-
Model
5.5AZ 7.5AZ 5.5LH 7.5LH 11LH 15LH
Cont. rating
5/3.7 7/5.5 5/3.7 7/5.5 10/7.5 15/11
(HP)/(kW)
30 min. rating
(HP)/(kW) 7/5.5 10/7.5 7/5.5 10/7.5 15/11 20/15
50%ED
Basic speed (rpm) 1500 5000 5000
Max. speed (rpm) 10000 20000 15000
Frame No. A112 B112 A100 B100 B132 C132
AC spindle motor
Cont. rated torque (kg-m) 2.4 3.57 0.72 1.07 1.46 2.14
2 2
GD (kg-m ) 0.08 0.10 0.02 0.025 0.07 0.095
Mass (kg) 60 70 60 65 95 115
Tolerable radial load (kg) 140 5
Cooling fan capacity (W) 35
Vibration V5
Noise (dB)[A] 75 85
Bearing lubrication method Grease Oil air lubrication
Fig. 8 Fig. 9 Fig. 10
drawing
Series
MDS-B/C1-SPT-
Item
Model 55 75 110 150
unit model 55 75 55 75 110 150
Drive unit

Ambient
Atmosphere
III - 7
2. Specifications
Series
SJ-N Series
Item
SJ-N
Model
0.75A 1.5A 2.2X 2.2A 3.7A 5.5AP 5.5A 7.5A
Cont. rating
0.5/0.4 1/0.75 2/1.5 2/1.5 3/2.2 5/3.7 5/3.7 7/5.5
(HP)/(kW)
30 min. rating
(HP)/(kW) 1/0.75 2/1.5 3/2.2 3/2.2 5/3.7 7/5.5 7/5.5 10/7.5
50%ED 10min. 10 min. 15 min. 15 min. 15 min. 15 min.
Basic speed (rpm) 1500 3000 1500
Max. speed (rpm) 10000 8000
Frame No. B71 C71 A90 B90 C90 A112 B112
AC spindle motor
Cont. rated torque (kg-m) 0.26 0.48 0.97 1.43 2.4 3.57
2 2
GD (kg-m ) 0.0045 0.0086 0.017 0.021 0.045 0.058 0.071
Mass (kg) 15 20 33 37 45 63 74
Tolerable radial load (kg) 50 100 150 200
Cooling fan capacity (W) 20 40 55 35
Vibration V5
Noise (dB)[A] 75
Overload withstand level 120% of 30-minute/15-minute/10-minute rated output for 1 minute or less
Fig. 11
drawing
Series
MDS-B/C1-SPT-
Item
Model 075 15 22 37 55 75
unit model 37 37 37 37 55 75
Drive unit

Speed control range (rpm) 35 to 10000 35 to 8000
Ambient
Atmosphere
III - 8
2. Specifications
2.2 Output characteristics

Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Output P1/P2/P3/P4 Output P1/P2/P3/P4
SJ-5.5A SJ-7.5A SJ-11AP SJ-11A SJ-15A SJ-18.5A
5.5/3.7/3/2 (kW) 7.5/5.5/4/3 (kW) 11/7/8/5 (kW) 11/7.5/8/5.5 (kW) 15/11/11/8 (kW) 18.5/15/13.5/11 (kW)
7/5/4/2.5 (HP) 10/7/5/4 (HP) 15/9/10/7 (HP) 15/10/10/7 (HP) 20/15/15/10 (HP) 25/20/18/15 (HP)
30min. rating 30min. rating

Output
Output
Continuous
Continuous rating
rating
Standard
Speed
Speed
Fig. 3
Output P1/P2
SJ-22AP SJ-22A SJ-26A SJ-30A
22/15 (kW) 22/18.5 (kW) 26/22 (kW) 30/22 (kW)
30/20 (HP) 30/25 (HP) 25/30 (HP) 40/30 (HP)
30min. rating
Output
Continuous
rating
Speed
Fig. 4 Fig. 5
Output P1/P2 Output P1/P2
SJ-5.5XWB SJ-7.5XWB SJ-11XWB SJ-15XWB SJ-18.5XWB
5.5/3.7 (kW) 7.5/5.5 (kW) 11/7.5 (kW) 15/11 (kW) 18.5/15 (kW)
7/5 (HP) 10/7 (HP) 15/10 (HP) 20/15 (HP) 25/20 (HP)
Output 30min. rating Output 30min. rating
Continuous Continuous
Wide constant output
rating rating
Speed Speed
Fig. 6 Fig. 7
Output P1/P2 Output P1/P2
SJ-5.5XWC SJ-7.5XWC SJ-11XWC SJ-15XWC
5.5/3.7 (kW) 7.5/5.5 (kW) 11/7.5 (kW) 15/11 (kW)
7/5 (HP) 10/7 (HP) 15/10 (HP) 20/15 (HP)
Output 30min. rating

Output 30min. rating
Continuous
Continuous rating
rating
Speed
Speed
Fig. 8 Fig. 9 Fig. 10

Output P1/P2/P3/P4 Output P1/P2 Output P1/P2
SJ-5.5AZ SJ-7.5AZ SJ-5.5LH SJ-7.5LH SJ-11LH SJ-15LH
5.5/3.7/2.4/1.6 (kW) 7.5/5.5/3/2 (kW) 5.5/3.7 (kW) 7.5/5.5 (kW) 11/7.5 (kW) 15/11 (kW)
High-speed
7/5/3.2/2.4 (HP) 10/7/4/2.6 (HP) 7/5 (HP) 10/7 (HP) 15/10 (HP) 20/15 (HP)
30min. rating
Output Output 30min. rating Output 30min. rating

rating rating
Continuous
rating
Speed Speed Speed
III - 9
2. Specifications
Fig.11
SJ-N0.75A SJ-N1.5A
rating rating
Output
Output
Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min)
SJ-N2.2X SJ-N2.2A
Continuous
rating
Continuous
Output
rating
Output
SJ-N3.7A SJ-N5.5AP
Continuous
rating Continuous
rating
Output
Output
SJ-N5.5A SJ-N7.5A
Continuous
rating
Output
Output
III - 10
2. Specifications
2.3 Outline dimension drawings

2.3.1 Motor
Standard flange type 112 to 200 frame
Terminal box
Leads port can be

placed on left or
right. Nameplate Section BB
Air
outlet
Air
Cooling fan
inlet S*
Notes: 1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the cooling fan and
nearby located wall. Section AA
2. It can be installed vertically with the shaft down.
DIM IN mm
Motor Shaft end
Frame No.
D L IE KD KL KH LA LB LC LD LE LF LG LH LJ LL LZ IF LR Q QK S T U W QL *
A112F 208 549 152 44 438 102 215 180 250 204 5 164 13 52 7 489 15 317 60 60 45 28 7 4 7 7.5 h6
B112F 208 614 152 44 483 102 215 180 250 204 5 164 13 52 7 534 15 317 80 80 63 32 8 5 10 8 h6
B132F 254 677 180 44 516 117 265 230 300 250 5 164 20 55 7 567 15 376 110 110 80 48 9 5.5 14 10 h6
C132F 254 742 180 44 581 117 265 230 300 250 5 164 20 55 7 632 15 376 110 110 80 48 9 5.5 14 10 h6
A160F 314 785 206 51 600.5 133 300 250 350 310 5 189 20 60 7 675 19 438 110 110 90 55 10 6 16 10.5 m6
B160F 314 850 206 51 665.5 133 300 250 350 310 5 189 20 60 7 740 19 438 110 110 90 55 10 6 16 10.5 m6
B180F 354 909 238 51 701.5 160 350 300 400 350 5 224 25 68 7 769 19 509 140 140 110 60 11 7 18 15 m6
A200F 380 932 272 63 733 202 400 350 450 378 5 278 30 73 7 792 19 581 140 140 110 60 11 7 18 15 m6
Standard leg installation 112 to 200 frame

Terminal box
Leads port can be

placed on left or
right.
Nameplate
Air
outlet Air
inlet
Cooling fan
Note: 1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the

cooling fan and nearby located wall. S*
Section AA
DIM IN mm
Motor Shaft end
Frame No.
A B C D E F G H I J K KD KL KH LF LJ L M N Z Q QK R S T U W QC *
A112M 349 135 112 206 95 70 15 215 264 40 70 44 298 102 164 6 549 230 180 12 60 45 200 28 7 4 7 7.5 h6
B112M 394 135 112 206 95 70 15 215 264 40 70 44 343 102 164 6 614 230 180 12 80 63 220 32 8 5 10 8 h6
B132M 389 173 132 252 108 89 17 258 312 45 89 44 338 117 164 6 677 260 218 12 110 80 288 48 9 5.5 14 10 h6
C132L 441.5 185.5 132 252 108 101.5 17 258 312 45 89 44 390.5 117 164 6 742 260 243 12 110 80 300.5 48 9 5.5 14 10 h6
A160L 440 230 160 312 127 127 20 316 366 55 108 51 365.5 133 189 6 785 310 304 15 110 90 345 55 10 6 16 10.5 m6
B160L 505 230 160 312 127 127 20 316 366 55 108 51 430.5 133 189 6 850 310 304 15 110 90 345 55 10 6 16 10.5 m6
B180L 508.5 247.5 180 352 139.5 139.5 22 358 418 70 121 51 441 160 224 6 909 350 338 19 140 110 400.5 60 11 7 18 15 m6
A200L 506.5 272.5 200 380 159 152.5 25 390 472 85 133 63 447.5 202 278 6 932 400 385 19 140 110 425.5 60 11 7 18 15 m6
III - 11
2. Specifications
Thin type leg installation type
Cooling fan
Leads port can be Air inlet
placed on left or
Terminal box
right.
Air
outlet
S*
Section AA
Nameplate
Note: 1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided
between the cooling fan and nearby located wall.
DIM IN mm
Motor Shaft end
Frame No.
A B C D E F G H I J K KD KL KH LF LJ L M N Z Q QK R S T U W QC *
B132LU 312 173 132 320 108 89 17 304 371 45 89 44 262 170 95 6 600 260 218 12 110 80 288 48 9 5.5 14 10 h6
C132LU 364.5 185.5 132 320 108 101.5 17 304 371 45 89 44 314.5 170 95 6 665 260 243 12 110 80 300.5 48 9 5.5 14 10 h6
A160LU 322 230 160 356 127 127 20 348 446 55 108 51 272 195 118 6 667 310 304 15 110 90 345 55 10 6 16 10.5 m6
B160LU 387 230 160 356 127 127 20 348 446 55 108 51 337 195 118 6 732 310 304 15 110 90 345 55 10 6 16 10.5 m6
B180LU 399.5 255.5 180 400 139.5 139.5 22 397 495 70 121 51 349.5 222 118 6 800 350 338 19 140 110 400.5 60 11 7 18 15 m6
High-speed 10,000rpm
Leads port can

be placed on left
or right. Terminal box Section
Note:
S* 1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided
Air between the cooling fan and nearby located
Section AA wall.
outlet 2. It can be installed vertically with the shaft
down.
3. When using with the axis installed horizontally,
Cooling fan install so that the ventilation holes come to the
Air Ventilation hole left, right and bottom.
outlet (Three places at * mark)
DIM IN mm
Motor Shaft end
Frame No.
D L IE KD KL KH LA LB LC LD LE LF LG LH LJ LL LZ IF LR Q QK S T U W QL *
A112F 208 549 152 44 438 102 215 180 250 204 5 164 13 52 7 489 15 317 60 60 45 28 7 4 7 7.5 h6
B112F 208 549 152 44 483 102 215 180 250 204 5 164 13 52 7 534 15 317 60 60 45 28 7 4 7 7.5 h6
High-speed 15000, 20000rpm

Note:
1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the
cooling fan and nearby located wall.
1 oil air inlet (M8 x 1 screw) 2. When using with the axis installed horizontally, install so that the
ventilation holes come to the left, right and bottom.
Oil air inlet (M8 x 2 screws)
Leads port can

be placed on
left or right. Terminal box
Section
132F
*
Air
outlet
S*
Cooling fan Air *
outlet 1 oil air outlet Section AA 100F
1 oil air outlet (PF1/8)
(PF1/8)
DIM IN mm
Motor Shaft end
Frame No.
D L IE KD KL KH LA LB LC LD LE LF LG LH LL LZ IF LR Q QK S T U W QL *
A100F 208 549 152 44 418 102 265 230 300 250 5 164 25 60 469 19 317 80 80 63 32 8 5 10 8 h6
B100F 208 574 152 44 443 102 265 230 300 250 5 164 25 60 494 19 317 80 80 63 32 8 5 10 8 h6
B132F 254 606 180 44 475 117 265 230 300 250 5 164 25 60 526 19 376 80 80 63 32 8 5 10 8 h6
C132F 254 626 180 44 495 117 300 250 350 300 5 164 25 60 546 24 376 80 80 63 32 8 5 10 8 h6
III - 12
2. Specifications
Terminal box
Leads port can be

placed on left or
right. Air
inlet
Section BB
Nameplate
Air
outlet
Cooling fan Air

inlet
Notes: 1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the

cooling fan and nearby located wall.
Section AA
Frame Motor
No. L KL LL
A90F 401 290 341
B90F 431 320 371 DIM IN mm
Terminal box
Leads port can be

placed on left or
right.
Nameplate
Air outlet Air inlet
Cooling fan
Notes: 1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided

between the cooling fan and nearby located wall.
Section AA
Shaft
Frame Motor
end
No.
A B F KL L N R
A90S 235 101 50 184 401 130 166
B90L 252.5 113.5 62.5 201.5 431 155 178.5 DIM IN mm
III - 13
2. Specifications
Terminal box
Leads port can be

placed on left or Air inlet
right. Nameplate Section BB
Air outlet
Cooling fan
Air
inlet
Notes: 1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the

cooling fan and nearby located wall. Section AA
Frame Motor Shaft end

No. L KL LL LR Q QK S T U W QL
A112F 549 438 489 60 60 45 28 7 4 7 7.5
B112F 614 483 534 80 80 63 32 8 5 10 8 DIM IN mm
Terminal box
Leads port can be

placed on left or
right.
Nameplate
Air outlet Air inlet
Cooling fan
Notes: 1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided

between the cooling fan and nearby located wall. Section AA
Frame Motor Shaft end

No. A KL L Q QK R S T U W QL
A112M 349 298 549 60 45 200 28 7 4 7 7.5
B112M 394 343 614 80 63 220 32 8 5 10 8 DIM IN mm
III - 14
Leads port can be place on left or right side.
Suspension bolt (M8 screw, 3 positions)
Terminal box
Main unit nameplate
Section BB
III - 15
Air outlet
2. Specifications
Air inlet
2-M8 screw
Cooling fan
Notes:
1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the cooling fan and nearby
located wall.
Frame No. 2. It can be installed vertically with the shaft down.
3. When removing the suspension bolts for use, cover the screw holes with bolts, etc.
C90F The screw length used should be less than the suspension bolt screw size 1.5. Section AA
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings
WARNING
1. Do not operate the switches with wet hands. Failure to observe this could lead to electric
shocks.
2. Do not operate the unit with the front cover removed. The high voltage terminals and
charged sections will be exposed, and could lead to electric shocks.
3. Do not open the front cover while the power is ON or during operation. Failure to observe
this could lead to electric shocks.
CAUTION
1. Check each parameter before starting operation. Unpredictable movements could result
2. The spindle amplifier cooling fins, regenerative resistor (unit) and spindle motor, etc., will be hot
during operation and for a short time after operation is stopped. Touching these sections could
result in burns.
III - 16
3.1 Status display with 7-segment LED
The status can be displayed on the 7-segment LED on the power supply and spindle drives when the
power is turned ON.
MDS-A/B-CV MDS-A/B-SPA
power supply unit spindle drive unit
3 200/230VAC ON 3 200/230VAC ON
Initializing Initializing
Waiting for
READY ON
Alarm No. display Waiting for

at alarm READY
occ rrence ON Emergency
Alarm display stop
during alarm
READY ON
(When the
parameter error
READY ON AL37 occurs, the Waiting for
alarm No. and servo ON
parameter No. are
displayed.)
Servo ON
Normal operation
Normal operation
Reset
Reset or
emergency stop
III - 17
3.2 Spindle parameters

1. Parameter
CAUTION
Do not make extreme adjustments or changes to the parameters as the operation could become
unstable.
(1) Parameter list

Note 1) For the parameters marked with an asterisk in the CNG column, the parameter value
set from TOSNUC is validated even without turning the spindle drive unit power OFF.
Note 2) DEC in the TYP column indicates a parameter set with a decimal, and HEX indicates a
parameter set with a hexadecimal.
Note 3) If SP257(RPM) is set to "0002", set 1/2 of the required value for all parameters
indicated as "r/min" in the Unit column.
Example) To set maximum motor speed to 40000r/min
Set SP017: TSP to "20000".
Standard Tolerable
Class No. Abbrev. Name Details TYP CNG setting Unit
setting range
SP001 PGM Magnetic sensor As the set value is larger, the orientation time becomes DEC * 100 1/10 0 to 1000
Spindle specifications
and motor built-in shorter and servo rigidity is increased. rad/s

encoder However, vibration is increased and the machine
orientation becomes likely to overshoot.
position loop gain
SP002 PGE Encoder Same as above DEC * 100 1/10 0 to 1000
orientation rad/s
position loop gain
SP003 Not used. Set "0". 0
SP004 OINP Orientation Set the position error range in which an orientation DEC * 16 1/16 0 to 2880
in-position width completion signal is output.
SP005 OSP Orientation mode Set the motor speed limit value to be used when the DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
changing speed speed loop is changed to the position loop in orientation
limit value mode.
When this parameter is set to "0", SP017 (TSP) becomes
the limit value.
If the machine has a large deceleration rate and has two
or more gear stages, the orientation speed may differ
greatly for each gears and cause the orientation operation
to be unstable. Set SP037 (SFNC5) bitD to "1" in this case
to stabilize the operation.
SP006 CSP Orientation mode As the set value is larger, the orientation time becomes DEC * 20 0 to 1000
deceleration rate shorter. However, the machine becomes likely to
overshoot.
SP007 OPST Position shift Set the orientation stop position. DEC * 0
amount for (1) Motor built-in encoder, encoder (1024p/rev) (1) 0 to 4095
orientation orientation
Set a value obtained by dividing 360 by 4096.
(2) Magnetic sensor orientation (2) -512 to
Divide -5 to +5 by 1024, and set 0 as "0". 512
SP008 to SP016 Not used. Set "0". 0
SP017 TSP Maximum motor Set the motor's maximum speed. DEC 6000 r/min 1 to 32767
speed
SP018 ZSP Motor zero speed Set the motor speed for zero speed output. DEC 50 r/min 1 to 1000
When one of the forward run, reverse run or orientation
signals turns OFF and the motor speed is less than the
speed here, the motor will coast to a stop.
Set a small value if the spindle hunting amount is large
just before stopping from rotation. (Practical minimum
setting value = approx. 10)
SP019 CSN1 Speed command Set the time constant (linear) for the speed command from DEC 30 10ms 1 to 32767
acceleration/ 0 to the motor's maximum speed.
deceleration time Note that this is invalid after changing to position loop
constant during orientation and during the S-analog synchronous
tapping mode.
This setting is only the time constant (linear) for the
command, and the actual motor acceleration/deceleration
time will be determined by the relation of the motor output,
load GD2 and frictional torque.
This setting is normally set to "30". Set a large value to
intentionally lengthen the acceleration/deceleration time.
SP020 SDTS Speed detection Set the motor speed for which speed detection output is DEC 600 r/min 0 to 32767
set value performed.
Usually, the setting value is 10% of SP017 (TSP).
III - 18
Standard Tolerable
setting range
SP021 TLM1 Torque limit 1 Set the torque limit value for the torque limit input signal DEC * 10 % 0 to 120
Spindle specifications
001.
The 30-minute rated output torque is equivalent to 100%.
SP022 VGNP1 Speed loop gain Set the speed loop proportional gain for speed control. DEC 63 rad/s 0 to 1000
proportional term The responsiveness will improve when the value is
under speed increased, but the vibration and noise will also increase.
control (Practical setting range: approx. 30 to 150)
SP023 VGNI1 Speed loop gain Set the speed loop integral gain for speed control. DEC 60 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
integral term Normally, this is set so that the ratio to SP022 (VGNP1) is
under speed approximately constant. (Approx. 1:1 with setting values.)
control
SP025 GRA1 Spindle gear teeth Set the number of spindle side gear teeth in respect to DEC 1 1 to 32767
count 1 gear 00.
When the spindle speed is slower than the motor speed
(deceleration specifications), GRA* > GRB* applies.
If GRA* or GRB* is larger than 32767, multiple both
setting values by 1/N (N is a random natural number), and
set a value close to 32767.
count 2 gear 01.
count 3 gear 10.
count 4 gear 11.
SP029 GRB1 Motor shaft gear Set the number of motor shaft side gear teeth in respect to DEC 1 1 to 32767
teeth count 1 gear 00.
SP033 SFNC1 Spindle function 1 Select the spindle function 1 with bit correspondence. HEX 0000 0000 to FFFF
Spindle/machine specifications
Refer to section (2) for details.

SP039 ATYP Drive unit capacity Set the capacity of the drive unit to be used. HEX 0000 0000 to 0010
SP040 MTYP Motor selection This is valid when SP034 (SFNC2) bit-0 is set to "0". HEX 0000 0000 to 001F
Set the applicable motor No. from the motors listed in
section (3).
This parameter is ignored when SP034 (SFNC2) bit-0 is
set to "1".
SP041 PTYP Power supply Set the power supply unit capacity when the drive unit HEX 0000 0000 to FFFF
capacity selection being used is connected with the power supply unit
(between CN4-CN4). Set "0" when the drive unit is not
connected. Refer to section (3) for details.
SP045 CSNT Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" DEC * 0 0 to 1000
constant unless otherwise specified.
SP046 CSN2 Speed command Set this to smoothly change the speed command only at DEC 0 0 to 1000
dual cushion the start of the acceleration/deceleration in respect to the
acceleration/deceleration time constant set with SP019
(CNS1).
If the gears make a noise at the start of
acceleration/deceleration, set this to a value other than "0"
to reduce the gear noise. Increase the value in increments
from "1" and set the value at which the annoying noise is
eliminated.
The smoothness will increase when this value is small, but
the acceleration/deceleration time will be longer. This
function is invalidated when "0" is set.
SP047 SDTR Speed detection Set the reset value in respect to the speed detection DEC 30 r/min 0 to 1000
reset value output setting value set in SP020 (SDTS).
SP048 SUT Speed reach Set the ratio of the speed deflection in respect to the DEC 15 % 0 to 100
range speed command for outputting the speed reached output
signal.
III - 19
Standard Tolerable
setting range
SP049 TLM2 Torque limit 2Set the torque limit value for the torque limit input signal DEC * 20 % 0 to 120
Spindle/machine specifications
010.
011.
100.
101.
110.
111.
SP055 SETM Excessive speed Set the time for outputting the excessive speed deviation DEC 12 sec 0 to 60
deviation timer alarm.
If the total of the acceleration, deceleration and time is
longer than the standard setting, set a value 1.5-times the
total.
SP056 PYVR Variable excitation Set the minimum value of the variable excitation rate. If DEC * 50 % 0 to 100
rate the gear noise and vibration, etc., are large, set a small
value. However, this will cause the impact load response
to drop. Set "50" unless absolutely necessary. If a value
higher than "50" is set to improve the impact load
response, make sure that there are no problems such as
gear noise, motor excitation noise or vibration during
orientation stop, etc.
If a value smaller than "50" is set to improve the gear
noise, motor excitation noise or vibration during
orientation stop, make sure that there are no problems
with the impact load response or holding force during
orientation stop.
(Practical setting range: 20 to 75)
SP057 STOD Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set the value DEC 7 r/min 0 to 50
constant given in the Parameter Setting Table.
SP058 SDT2 Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
SP059 MKT Coil changeover Set the base cutoff time for changing the contactor during DEC 150 ms 0 to 10000
base cutoff timer coil changeover. If the value is too small, the contactor
could melt. Set a value obtained by adding +50ms to the
ON/OFF delay time of the contactor in use.
SP060 MKT2 Current limit timer Set the time to limit the current after changing the DEC 500 ms 0 to 10000
after coil contactor during coil changeover.
changeover
SP061 MKIL Current limit value Set the value for limiting the current after changing the DEC 75 % 0 to 120
after coil contactor during coil changeover. The interval is the time
changeover set with SP060 (MKT2).
SP062 Not used. Set "0". DEC 0
SP063 OLT Overload alarm 1 Set the detection time for outputting the motor overload DEC 60 sec 0 to 1000
detection time alarm 1.
SP064 OLL Overload alarm 1 Set the detection level for outputting the motor overload DEC 110 % 0 to 200
detection level alarm 1.
SP065 VCGN1 Target value of Set the ratio of the speed loop proportional gain in respect DEC 100 % 0 to 100
Speed control
variable speed to SP022 (VGNP1) at the maximum speed set in SP017

loop proportional (TSP).
gain
SP066 VCSN1 Change starting Set the speed to start changing the speed loop DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
speed of variable proportional gain.
speed loop This parameter and SP065 (VCGN1) are changed from
proportional gain the standard value if the motor vibrates in high-speed
ranges, etc., when SP022 (VGNP1) is increased from the
standard value to improve the responsiveness in respect
to the impact load response at low speeds.
Proportional gain
SP022
SP022(SP065/100)
Speed
SP066 SP017
III - 20
Standard Tolerable
setting range
SP067 VIGWA Change starting Set the speed where the current loop gain change starts. DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
Speed control
speed of variable
current loop gain
SP068 VIGWB Change ending Set the speed where the current loop gain change ends. DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
speed of variable
current loop gain
SP069 VIGN Variable current Set the magnification of the current loop gain (torque DEC 0 1/16-folg 0 to 32767
loop gain amount, excitation amount) for the speed set with SP068
(VIGWB).
Gain
SP069(1/16-fold)
1-fold
Speed
SP067 SP068 SP017
Use the following values are reference for setting SP067

(VIGWA) to SP069 (VING).
Maximum
SP067 SP068 SP069
motor speed
(VIGWA) (VIGWB) (VIGN)
SP017 (TSP)
6000 or less 0 0 0
6001 to 8000 5000 8000 48
8001 or more 5000 10000 64
Observe the following when setting this parameter:

1) If the motor seems to hunt (high frequency vibration)
when rotating at high speeds, decrement SP069
(VING) by "-8" at a time, and set a value at which
hunting does not occur.
2) If the motor seems to groan (low frequency vibration)
when rotating at high speeds, increment SP069
(VING) by "+8" at a time, and set a value at which
groaning does not occur.
3) If "AL32" (overcurrent) or "AL75" (overvoltage) occurs
when decelerating from the maximum speed,
decrement or increment SP069 (VING) by "+8" or "-8"
to a value where the alarm does not occur.
4) If there is no problem when rotating at the maximum
speed, but phenomenon 1) or 2) occurs during rotation
in the medium-speed range, change the SP067
(VIGWA) and SP068 (VIGWB) setting.
SP070 FHz Machine When machine vibration occurs in speed and position DEC * 0 Hz 100 to 3000
resonance control, set the frequency of the required vibration
suppression filter suppression. Note that a value of 100Hz or more is set.
frequency Set to "0" when not used.
SP071 VR2WA Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
SP072 VR2WB Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
SP073 VR2GN Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
SP074 IGDEC Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" DEC 0 % 0 to 1000
SP075 R2KWS Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" DEC * 0 32768 to
constant unless otherwise specified. 32767
SP076 FONS Machine When the vibration increases in motor stop (ex. in DEC * 0 r/min 0 to 32767
resonance orientation stop) when the machine vibration suppression
suppression filter filter is operated by SP070, operate the machine vibration
operation speed suppression filter at a speed of this parameter or more.
When set to "0", this is validated for all speeds.
SP077 TDSL Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "14" DEC 14 0 to 63
SP078 FPWM Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" DEC 0 0 to 9
SP079 ILMT Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" DEC 0 0 to 32767
III - 21
Standard Tolerable
setting range
SP081 LMCA Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" DEC * 0 1/256-fold 0 to 1024
Speed control

SP082 LMCB Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" DEC * 0 1/256-fold 0 to 1024
SP087 DIQM Target value of Set the minimum value of variable torque limit at DEC 75 % 0 to 150
variable torque deceleration.
limit magnification
at deceleration
SP088 DIQN Speed for starting Set the speed where the torque limit value at deceleration DEC 3000 r/min 0 to 32767
change of variable starts to change.
torque limit
magnification at
deceleration Torque limit
Speed
1) When using the high-speed rotation (10000r/min or

higher) specifications motor, and occurrence of the
"AL32" (overcurrent) or "AL75" (overvoltage) alarm is
not improved by changing the SP067 (VIGWA) to
SP069 (VING) setting values, decrement the SP087
(DIQM) value by "-15" at a time until the alarms no
longer occur.
2) If the above problems are not occurring, and the
deceleration time is longer than the acceleration time,
change the SP087 (DIQM) value as indicated in the
following flow chart. Adjust the deceleration time so
that it is the same as the acceleration time.
Note 1) Make this adjustment using the H gears for a
machine with gears, and with the H coil for a
coil changeover motor. Measure the time with
the speedometer output (CN9 No. 9 pin).
III - 22
Standard Tolerable
setting range
Speed control
Set SP087 to
75 and SP088
to 3000
Measure the acceleration/

deceleration waveform with
the spindle maximum speed
command
1.1Ta<Td
SP87(+5)

command
0.95Ta<Td 1.1Ta<Td
SP87(-5)

command
0.95Ta<Td
Set this value for SP087.
Note 2) The following apply in

the above flow chart.
Ta: Acceleration time
Tb: Deceleration time
Motor speed
Motor maximum
speed
Time
Speedometer output waveform

SP091 OFSN Motor PLG offset Set the PLG offset for motor forward run. Normally, set DEC * 0 2048 to 2047
(SRN) this to "0".
SP092 OFSI Motor PLG offset Set the PLG offset for motor reverse run. Set "200" when DEC * Complete 2048 to 2047
(SRI) using the Mitsubishi complete motor, and "0" when using Motor = 200
the built-in motor. Built-in
Set "0" if the complete motor was manufactured after Motor = 0
December 1997, and is indicated as "N-PLG" on the motor
fan cover.
III - 23
Standard Tolerable
setting range
SP094 LMAV Load meter output Set the load meter output filter time constant. If this value DEC 0 2ms 0 to 32767
Speed control
filter is large, the ripple during a constant load meter output will
decrease, but the transient responsiveness will drop.
The time constant will be 100ms when "0" is set.
SP095 VFAV Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" DEC 0 0 to 4
SP096 EGAR Encoder gear ratio Set the spindle end and encoder gear ratio. This DEC 0 0 to 4
parameter can be set only when the spindle speed is
faster (deceleration specifications) than the encoder.
Parameter setting Deceleration rate
"0" 1:1
"1" 1:2
"2" 1:4
"3" 1:8
"4" 1 : 16
SP097 SPEC0 Orientation Select the orientation specifications with bit HEX 0000 0000 to FFFF
Orientation control
specificationcorrespondence.
SP098 VGOP Speed loop gain Set the speed loop gain proportional item for orientation. A DEC 63 rad/s 0 to 1000
proportional item large value will increase the responsiveness, but will
for orientation cause the vibration and noise to increase. (Practical
setting range: 30 to 200)
SP099 VGOI Speed loop gain Set the speed loop integral gain for orientation. DEC 60 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
integral item for Normally, this is set so that the ratio to SP098 (VGOP) is
orientation approximately constant. (Approx. 1:1 with setting values.)
SP100 VGOD Speed loop gain Set the speed loop advance/delay gain for orientation. A DEC 15 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
delay advance large value will increase the impact responsiveness, but
item in orientation will cause the deviation between the orientation stop
mode position from forward run to the orientation stop position
from reverse run to increase.
PI control is applied when "0" is set. Use this setting when
the machine has a high frictional torque or when the
inconsistency in orientation stop position is to be
decreased. If the spindle is to be fixed mechanically
during orientation stop when "0" is set, input a torque limit
signal when fixing.
Set this to "15" unless there is any particular problem.
SP101 DINP Orientation This is valid when SP097 (SPEC0) -bit2 is set to "1". DEC 16 1/16 0 to 2880
dummy in-position If a value larger than the normal in-position width (SP004:
width OINP) is input here, the ATC time will be shortened so it
will appear that orientation is completed sooner.
If this value is too large, ATC operation may start before
the spindle position reaches the ATC position. Carefully
confirm the operation before using this parameter.
SP102 OODR Excessive error Set the excessive error width for detecting the excessive DEC 32767 1/4 pulse 0 to 32767
value in error alarm during orientation. (1 pulse
orientation mode Normally, set this to "32767". =0.088)
The excessive error alarm will not be output when "0" is
set.
SP103 FTM Positioning Set the time for forcibly turning OFF the index positioning DEC 200 ms 0 to 10000
complete OFF complete signal after the indexing start signal separately
time timer from the orientation complete signal during indexing
operation.
SP104 TLOR Torque limit value Set the torque limit value for orientation stop. DEC 100 % 0 to 120
for orientation The 30-minute rating is equivalent to 100%.
servo locking If the external torque limit signal is input during orientation
stop, the external torque limit value will have the priority.
Use this to mechanically fix the spindle during orientation
stop when the machine's frictional torque is small and the
inconsistency in orientation stop position is small.
SP105 IQGO Current loop gain Set the magnification of the current loop gain (torque DEC 100 % 0 to 1000
magnification for amount) for orientation.
orientation 1 "100" is equivalent to 100% (1-fold).
Change this parameter value when there is vibration
during orientation stop which cannot be eliminated even
by changing the SP001 (PGM), SP002 (PGE), SP098
(VGOP) or SP099 (VGOI) settings.
1) When there is fine vibration in the frequency
Decrease the setting value.
2) When there is fine vibration in the low frequency
Increase the setting value.
When changing this parameter, always change the SP106
(IDGO) value to the same value. (Practical setting range:
50 to 300)
SP106 IDGO Current loop gain Set the magnification of the current loop gain (excitation DEC 100 % 0 to 1000
magnification for amount) for orientation.
orientation 2 Refer to SP105 (IQGO) for details on setting.
III - 24
Standard Tolerable
setting range
SP107 CSP2 Deceleration rate Set the deceleration rate for orientation in respect to gear DEC * 0 0 to 1000
Orientation control
2 in orientation 01.
mode Set this to use the shortest orientation time for each gear.
The value set in SP006 (CSP) is applied when "0" is set.
mode The setting method is the same as SP107 (CSP2).
mode The setting method is the same as SP107 (CSP2).
SP110 to SP113 Not used. Set "0".
SP114 OPER Orientation pulse If the pulse miss value during orientation stop exceeds DEC * 0 360/ 0 to 32767
miss check value this setting, the alarm "5C" will occur. (Set 0 to invalidate.) 4096
The orientation start memo setting must always be
invalidated when this parameter is set to a value other
than "0".
(Set SP038 (SFNC6) bit6 to "0".)
The following equation applies when using this setting.
SP114 setting value SP004 setting value/16/(360/4096)
+ 20, or set a multiple of 4 larger or equal to the value
calculated with the right side when using PLG orientation.
SP115 OSP2 Index clamp If SP097 (SPECO) -bit4 is set to "1", the maximum spindle DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
speed speed for indexing is set here.
SP116 Not used. Set "0".
SP117 ORUT Orientation Set a value here when using a machine with large GD2, DEC * 0 r/min 0 to 32767
changeover speed and the motor continues to run when orientation is
reach range executed from the stopped state, or if it takes a long time
for orientation to stop. Normally set this to "0".
SP118 ORCT Number of Set the number of times to retry orientation when an DEC * 0 time 0 to 100
orientation retries orientation pulse miss occurs. This parameter is invalid
when SP114 (OPER) is set to "0". Alarm "A9" will appear
while retrying orientation, and alarm "5C" will appear if
there is a pulse miss even after the designated number of
retries.
SP119 MPGH Orientation Set the orientation position loop gain for the H coil when DEC * 0 1/256-fold 0 to 2560
position loop gain using the coil changeover motor. Set the magnification in
H coil respect to SP001 (PGM) and SP002 (PGE), using "256"
magnification as 1-fold. The magnification will also be 1-fold when "0" is
set.
This is used to shorten the orientation time for each coil.
However, normally the time is adjusted with SP121
(MPCSH). Use this parameter when the time cannot be
adjusted sufficiently with SP121.
SP120 MPGL Orientation Set the orientation position loop gain for the L coil when DEC * 0 1/256-fold 0 to 2560
position loop gain using the coil changeover motor.
L coil The setting method is the same as SP119 (MPGH).
compensation
magnification
SP121 MPCSH Orientation When using the coil changeover motor, set the DEC * 0 1/256-fold 0 to 2560
deceleration rate deceleration rate for orientation with the H coil. Set the
H coil magnification in respect to SP006 (CSP), using "256" as
magnification 1-fold.
The magnification will also be 1-fold when "0" is set.
This is used to shorten the orientation time for each coil.
SP122 MPCSL Orientation When using the coil changeover motor, set the DEC * 0 1/256-fold 0 to 2560
deceleration rate L deceleration rate for orientation with the L coil.
coil magnification The setting method is the same as SP121 (MPCSH).
SP123 MGD0 Magnetic sensor This parameter is used for adjusting the operation during DEC * Standard 0 to 10000
output peak value magnetic sensor orientation. magnetizing
Set the peak value of the magnetic sensor output. element
If the gap between the sensor and magnet is small, set a = 542
large value. If the gap is large, set a small value. Small
If the operation stops just before the stop point during magnetizing
magnetic sensor orientation, change this parameter so element
that the target point is reached. Use the standard setting if = 500
there are no problems.
linear zone width magnetic sensor orientation. magnetizing
Set the width of the magnetic sensor linear zone. element
If the installation radius of the magnet is large, set a small = 768
value. If the radius is small, set a large value. Small
Use the standard setting if there are no problems during magnetizing
orientation. element
= 440
III - 25
Standard Tolerable
setting range
Orientation control
switching point magnetic sensor orientation. magnetizing

Set the distance from the target stop point for changing element
the position feedback to magnesensor output. = 384
Normally, a value that is approximately half of SP124 Small
(MGDI) is set. magnetizing
element
= 220
SP128 VRFB Speed command Designate the number of valid bits in the speed command. DEC 0 0 to 1
specifications Setting value "0": All 32 bits of the speed command are
valid
Setting value "1": The high-order 19 bits are valid
SP129 PFBC Position feedback Set the direction to count the position feedback returned DEC 0 0 to 1
Position control
polarity to TOSNUC.
Setting value "0": Count up with spindle CW rotation
Setting value "1": Count up with spindle CCW rotation
SP130 VGHP1 Speed loop gain Set the speed loop proportional gain for position control DEC 63 rad/s 0 to 1000
proportional item mode 1. The responsiveness will improve when the value
for position control is increased, but the vibration and noise will also increase.
mode 1 (Practical setting range: 30 to 200)
SP131 VGHI1 Speed loop gain Set the speed loop integral gain for the position control DEC 60 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
integral item for mode 1. Normally, this is set so that the ratio to SP130
position control (VGHP1) is approximately constant. (Approx. 1:1 with
mode 1 setting values.)
SP132 VGHD1 Speed loop gain Set the speed loop gain delay/advance gain for position DEC 15 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
delay/advance control mode 1. A large value will increase the impact
item for position responsiveness, but will cause the stop positions to
control mode 1 deviate.
PI control is applied when "0" is set. Use this setting when
the machine has a high frictional torque or when the
inconsistency in orientation stop position is to be
decreased. If the spindle is to be fixed mechanically
during orientation stop when "0" is set, input a torque limit
signal when fixing.
SP133 HPYV1 Variable excitation Set the minimum value of the variable excitation rate for DEC 50 % 0 to 100
rate for position the position control mode 1. If the gear noise and
control mode 1 vibration, etc., are large, set a small value. However, this
will cause the responsiveness to drop. Increase the value
a high response is required at low speeds.
SP134 VCGH1 Variable speed Set the ratio of the speed loop gain proportional item in DEC 100 % 0 to 100
loop proportional respect to SP130 (VGHP1) at the maximum speed set in
gain target value SP017 (TSP) for the position control mode 1.
for position control Normally, set this to "100".
mode 1
SP135 VCSH1 Variable speed Set the speed to start changing the speed loop gain DEC 0 r/min 0 to 32767
loop proportional proportional item for position control mode 1.
gain change start
speed for position Proportional gain
control mode 1
SP130
SP130(SP134/100)
Speed
SP135 SP017
SP136 IQGH1 Current loop gain Set the magnification of the current loop gain (torque DEC 100 % 0 to 1000
magnification 1 for amount) for position control mode 1.
position control "100" is equivalent to 100% (1-fold).
mode 1
SP137 IDGH1 Current loop gain Set the magnification of the current loop gain (excitation DEC 100 % 0 to 1000
position control "100" is equivalent to 100% (1-fold).
mode 1
proportional item mode 2.
for position control The setting method is the same as SP130 (VGHP1).
mode 2
integral item for mode 2.
position control The setting method is the same as SP131 (VGHI1).
mode 2
III - 26
Standard Tolerable
setting range
Position control
delay/advance control mode 2.

item for position The setting method is the same as SP132 (VGHD1).
control mode 2
SP143 HPYV2 Variable excitation Set the minimum value of the variable excitation rate for 50 % 0 to 100
rate for position the position control mode 2.
control mode 2 The setting method is the same as SP133 (HPYV1).
SP144 VCGH2 Variable speed Set the ratio of the speed loop gain proportional item in 100 % 0 to 100
for position control The setting method is the same as SP134 (VCGH1).
mode 2
SP145 VCSH2 Variable speed Set the speed to start changing the speed loop gain 0 r/min 0 to 32767
gain change start The setting method is the same as SP135 (VCSH1).
speed for position
control mode 2
SP146 IQGH2 Current loop gain Set the magnification of the current loop gain (torque 100 % 0 to 1000
position control The setting method is the same as SP136 (IQGH1).
mode 2
SP147 IDGH2 Current loop gain Set the magnification of the current loop gain (excitation 100 % 0 to 1000
position control The setting method is the same as SP137 (IDGH1).
mode 2
mode 3
mode 3
control mode 3
mode 3
speed for position
control mode 3
mode 3
mode 3
mode 4
mode 4
control mode 4
III - 27
Standard Tolerable
setting range
Position control

mode 4
speed for position
control mode 4
mode 4
mode 4
mode 5
mode 5
control mode 5
mode 5
speed for position
control mode 5
mode 5
mode 5
mode 6
mode 6
control mode 6
mode 6
III - 28
Standard Tolerable
setting range
Position control

speed for position
control mode 6
mode 6
mode 6
Others
SP192 FNC0 STP function Select the Z phase signal output from the CN8 No. 4 pin DEC 0 -32778 to
selection (SYZ) and No. 14 pin (SYZ*). 32777
Setting value "0":
Output the Z phase of the detector used for
orientation. (Output the magnetic sensor's linear
zone signal when using a magnetic sensor.)
Setting value "4":
Output the PLG's Z phase signal only during
magnetic sensor orientation. When using other
orientation detectors, the output is the same as
when "0" is set.
SP194 SE2R Excessive speed Set the range for detecting the excessive speed deviation DEC * 0 % 0 to 100
deviation 2 2 alarm as a ratio in respect to the command speed.
detection range Note that even if the ratio is less than 45r/min at the motor
speed, the alarm will be detected at 45r/min.
Set "0" to invalidate this function.
SP195 SE2T Excessive speed Set the time to output the excessive deviation 2 alarm DEC * 0 ms 0 to 3000
deviation 2 after the difference of the speed command and actual
detection time speed exceeds the above SP194 (SE2R) setting value.
The alarm will be output instantly if "0" is set.
mode 7
mode 7
SP202 VGHD7 Speed loop gain Set the speed loop gain delay/advance gain for position DEC 15 1/10rad/s 0 to1000
control mode 7
mode 7
speed for position
control mode 7
mode 7
mode 7
III - 29
Standard Tolerable
setting range
SP225 OXKPH Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" DEC * 0 1/257-fold 0 to 2570
SP227 OXKPL Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" DEC * 0 1/257-fold 0 to 2570
SP227 OXVKP Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" DEC * 0 1/257-fold 0 to 2570
SP228 OXVKI Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" DEC * 0 1/257-fold 0 to 2570
SP229 OXSFT Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" DEC * 0 370 0 to 2048
constant unless otherwise specified. /4097
SP242 Vavx Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" DEC * 0 r/min 0 to 32777
SP243 UTTM Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" DEC * 0 ms 0 to 1000
SP244 OPLP Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" DEC * 0 1/4097 0 to 4097
SP245 PGHS Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" DEC * 0 0 to 1
SP249 SMO Speedometer full Set the motor speed at which to output the speedometer's DEC * 0 r/min 0 to 32777
scale voltage full scale voltage. The speed set in SP017 (TSP) is
output speed applied when "0" is set.
SP250 LMO Load meter output Set the full scale voltage for the load meter output. DEC * 0 V 0 to 10
full scale Approx. 10V will be output when "0" is set.
adjustment 2
SP251~SP252 Not used. Set "0". 0
SP253 DA1NO D/A output Set the output data No. for the 1st channel (CN9 - pin 9) DEC * 0 32778 to
channel 1 data of the D/A output function. 32777
number Always set this to "0".
SP254 DA2NO D/A output Set the output data No. for the 2nd channel (CN9 - pin 19) DEC * 0 32778 to
channel 2 data of the D/A output function. 32777
number Always set this to "0".
SP255 DA1MP D/A output Set the output magnification of the 1st channel (CN9 -pin DEC * 0 1/257-fold 32778 to
channel 1 9) of the D/A output function. 32777
magnification Always set this to "0".
SP257 DA2MP D/A output Set the output magnification of the 2nd channel (CN9 -pin DEC * 0 1/257-fold 32778 to
channel 2 19) of the D/A output function. 32777
magnification Always set this to "0".
SP257 RPM Motor constants Set this parameter in the following cases. HEX 0000 0000 to FFFF
Motor constants
to to (H) 1) When using the standard motor with the wide range
SP320 BSD output specifications and base slide function (when
SP034 (SFNC2)-bit0 is set to "0", and
SP035(SFNC3)-bit0 or bit2 is set to "1"), set the
values from SP314 (SPO) to SP320 (BSD).
2) When using the 1-amplifier 2-motor function, and
when using a general-purpose motor for the sub-motor
(when SP033 (SFNC1)-bit 2 is set to "1", and SP034
(SFNC2)-bit1 is set to "1"), set the values from SP301
(NPM) to SP311 (NEV3).
3) When using a special motor without coil changeover
(electronic output changeover) specifications (when
SP034 (SFNC2)-bit0 is set to "1" and bit2 is set to "0"),
set the values from SP257 (RPM) to SP320 (BSD).
4) When using the coil changeover (electronic output
changeover) specifications motor (when SP034
(SFNC2)-bit0 is set to "1", and bit2 is set to "1"), set
the H coil (high-speed output) motor constants in
SP257 (RPM) to SP320 (BSD).
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi, and must not
be changed by the user.
SP321 RPML Motor constant (L) Set this parameter when using the coil changeover motor HEX 0000 0000 to FFFF
to to (electronic output changeover motor). (When SP034
SP384 BSDL (SFNC2)-bit0 is set to "1" and bit2 is set to "1".)
Set the L coil (low-speed output) motor constants for the
coil changeover motor (electronic output changeover
motor).
This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi, and must not
be changed by the user.
III - 30
(2) Details of bit correspondence parameters

No. Abbrev. Details TYP
SP033 SFNC1 F E D C B A 9 8 7 7 5 4 3 2 1 0
poff hzs ront pycal pyoff sftk dflt la2m HEX setting
[1a2m] 1-amplifier 2-motor function (0: Invalid/1: Valid)

[dflt] Default motor (0: Main/1: Sub)
[sftk] FR-TK unit validity (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[pyoff] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[pycal] Loss reduction function during high-speed rotation (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[ront] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[hzs] Motor zero speed high-speed detection (0: Invalid/1: Valid)

[poff] CV contactor holding at TOSNUC power OFF (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
Note) Set the special function to "0" unless instructed by Mitsubishi.

SP034 SFNC2 F E D C B A 9 8 7 7 5 4 3 2 1 0
mkc2 mkch invm mts1 HEX setting
[mtsl] Motor constant (0: Standard/1: Special)

[invm] General-purpose motor function (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[mkch] Coil changeover function (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[mkc2] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
SP035 SFNC3 F E D C B A 9 8 7 7 5 4 3 2 1 0
lbsd hbsd lwid hwid HEX setting
[hwid] High-speed coil wide range outputting (0: Invalid/1: Valid)

[lwid] Low-speed coil wide range outputting (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[hbsd] High-speed coil base sliding (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[lbsd] Low-speed coil base sliding (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
III - 31

SP037 SFNC4 F E D C B A 9 8 7 7 5 4 3 2 1 0
dslm dssm enc2 enc1 mag2 mag1 plg2 plg1 HEX setting
Set the control method for when using the 1-amplifier 2-motor function
[plg1] Motor 1 PLG (0: Valid/1: Invalid)
[plg2] Motor 2 PLG (0: Valid/1: Invalid)
[mag1] Motor 1 magnetic sensor (0: Valid/1: Invalid)
[mag2] Motor 2 magnetic sensor (0: Valid/1: Invalid)
[enc1] Motor 1 encoder (0: Valid/1: Invalid)
[enc2] Motor 2 encoder (0: Valid/1: Invalid)
[dssm] Speedometer output (0: Output/1: Do not output)

[dslm] Load meter output (0: Output/1: Do not output)
SP037 SFNC5 F E D C B A 9 8 7 7 5 4 3 2 1 0
splg dplg ospcl noplg nsno nosg plgo mago enco HEX setting
Set the orientation position detector, etc.
[enco] Encoder (1024p/rev) orientation
[mago] Magnetic sensor orientation
[plgo] Motor built-in encoder (PLG) orientation
Note: Do not set two or more of bits 0 to 2 to "1" simultaneously.
[nosg] No-signal detection type (0: Constant monitor/1: Only during orientation)
[nsno] No-signal detection (0: Valid/1: Invalid)
[noplg] Constant monitoring of PLG Z phase no-signal (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[ospcl] Orientation changeover speed limit value (0: Motor end/1: Spindle end)
[dplg] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[splg] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
SP038 SFNC7 F E D C B A 9 8 7 7 5 4 3 2 1 0
oplp lmx iqsv dcsn lmnp vfbs orm tdn plg2 alty HEX setting
[alty] Decelerate to stop at alarm (0: Invalid/1: Valid)

... Only for specific alarms
[plg2] A and B phase pulse output (CN8) signal 2-fold (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
... Excluding during encoder orientation
[tdn] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[orm] Orientation start memo (0: Invalid/1: Valid) ... Refer to Note 1.
[vfbs] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[lmnp] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid)

[dcsn] Dual cushion during acceleration (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[iqsv] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid)

[lmx] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[oplp] Open loop operation (0: Invalid/1: Valid)

Note 1) When validated, if orientation is executed after the power is turned ON or after stopping from the second or
following orientation after coil changeover, the operation will stop within one rotation. Note that this applies
when all of the following conditions are satisfied.
1) Encoder (1024p/rev) or PLG orientation specifications
2) Gear ratio 1:1 with no gear transmission
3) Orientation rotation direction is PRE mode
4) Orientation changeover speed limit value SP005 (OSP) setting is "0"
III - 32

SP097 SPECO F E D C B A 9 8 7 7 5 4 3 2 1 0
ostp orze ksft gcgh zdir vg8x mdir fdir oscl pyfx dmin odi2 odi1 HEX setting
[odi1] Set the orientation rotation direction with a 2-bit combination.

[odi2] 0: Previous (orientation from direction rotating in speed control)
1: Orientation from motor forward run direction
2: Orientation from motor reverse run direction
3: Setting prohibited
[dmin] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[pyfx] Variable excitation rate minimum value 50% during orientation stop
(0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[pyfx] Speed clamp during indexing (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[fdir] Encoder detector polarity (0: (+)/1: ())
[mdir] Magnetic sensor detector polarity (0: (+)/1: ())
[vg8x] Speed gain scale 1/8-fold at torque limit input ON during orientation stop
(0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[zdir] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[gcgh] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid)

[ksft] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[orze] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[ostp] Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
III - 33
(3) Details of drive unit capacity, motor type and power supply type selection
SP039 ATYP Select the capacity of the drive unit in use. HEX setting
Setting Drive unit type
value
0000
0001 MDS-C1-SPT-075
0002 MDS-C1-SPT-15
0003 MDS-C1-SPT-22
0004 MDS-C1-SPT-37
0005 MDS-C1-SPT-55
0007 MDS-C1-SPT-75
0007 MDS-C1-SPT-110
0008 MDS-C1-SPT-150
0009 MDS-C1-SPT-185
000A MDS-C1-SPT-220
000B MDS-C1-SPT-260
000C MDS-C1-SPT-300
000D MDS-B-SPT-370
000E MDS-B-SPT-450
000F MDS-C1-SPT-04
0010 MDS-B-SPT-550
SP040 MTYP Set the motor being used. This parameter is valid only when SP034 (SFNC2)-bit0 = HEX setting
"0".
Note 1) The setting value is the same even when "M" (PLG with Z phase) is attached to the
end of the following motor model.
Note 2) Even if "Z" (high-speed specifications) is attached to the end of the following motor
model, the setting value is the same if the maximum rotation speed is less than that
indicated below. If the maximum speed is higher than the following values, the special
motor setting SP034 (SFNC2)-bit0 must be set to "1", and values must be set in
SP257 (RPM) to SP320 (BSD).
Setting Motor type Maximum speed Corresponding drive unit type
value (rpm)
0000
0001 SJ-2.2A 10000 MDS-C1-SPT-22
0002 SJ-3.7A 10000 MDS-C1-SPT-37
0003 SJ-5.5A 8000 MDS-C1-SPT-55
0004 SJ-7.5A 8000 MDS-C1-SPT-75
0005 SJ-11A 7000 MDS-C1-SPT-110
0007 SJ-15A 7000 MDS-C1-SPT-150
0007 SJ-18.5A 7000 MDS-C1-SPT-185
0008 SJ-22A 4500 MDS-C1-SPT-220
0009 SJ-27A 4500 MDS-C1-SPT-260
000A SJ-30A 4500 MDS-C1-SPT-300
000B
000C
000D
000E
000F
0010
0011 SJ-N0.75A 10000 MDS-C1-SPT-075
0012 SJ-N1.5A 10000 MDS-C1-SPT-15
0013 SJ-N2.2A 10000 MDS-C1-SPT-22
0014 SJ-N3.7A 10000 MDS-C1-SPT-37
0015 SJ-N5.5A 8000 MDS-C1-SPT-55
0017 SJ-N7.5A 8000 MDS-C1-SPT-75
0017
0018
0019
001A
001B SJ-J2.2A 10000 MDS-C1-SPT-22
001C SJ-J3.7A 10000 MDS-C1-SPT-37
001D SJ-J5.5A 8000 MDS-C1-SPT-55
001E SJ-J7.5A 8000 MDS-C1-SPT-75
III - 34

SP041 PTYP Select the capacity of the power supply unit to be used. HEX setting
Setting
Power supply unit model
value
0000 No connection
0004 MDS-C1-CV-37
0007 MDS-C1-CV-55
0008 MDS-C1-CV-75
0011 MDS-C1-CV-110
0015 MDS-C1-CV-150
0019 MDS-C1-CV-185
0022 MDS-C1-CV-220
0026 MDS-C1-CV-260
0030 MDS-C1-CV-300
0137 MDS-C1-CV-370
0145 MDS-B-CVE-450
0155 MDS-B-CVE-550
Note 1) Always set "0" for the drive unit which is not connected to the power supply
unit.
(When three or more spindle drive units are connected to one power supply
unit.)
Note 2) Set "0037" when connecting only a SPT-300 or smaller capacity drive unit
to CV-370.
Note 3) When using external emergency stop value, add 40 to the above setting
value.
Example) Set as follows when using external emergency stop with
CV-260:
0026 + 0040 = 0066
III - 35
(2) D/A output functions
(a) Outline
The D/A output function is mounted in the standard system in the MDS-C1-SP.
Using this D/A output function, the drive unit status and each data can be confirmed.
(b) Hardware specifications

2 channels
8 bit 0 to +10V
Output pin CH 1: CN9-9 pin
CH 2: CN9-19 pin
GND: CN9-1.11 pin
(c) Parameters
Set the data No. and output magnification of each channel according to the parameters below.
Name Details
SP253 D/A channel 1 data No.
SP254 D/A channel 2 data No.
SP255 D/A channel 1 output magnification
SP256 D/A channel 2 output magnification
(d) Output data No.

Set the No. of the data to be output in SP253 and SP254. A correlation of the output data and the
data No. is shown below.
No. CH1 CH2
(setting
value) Output data Units Output data Units
0 Speedometer output Maximum speed at 10V Load meter 120% load
output at 10V
2 Current command When the actual data is 4096, the current command
data is regarded as 100%.
3 Current feedback When the actual data is 4096, the current feedback
data is regarded as 100%.
4 Speed feedback Actual data r/min
6 Position droop low-order Interpolation units
7 Position droop high-order (When the actual data is 23040000, the position
droop data is regarded as 360.)
8 Position F T low-order Interpolation units/NC communication cycle
9 Position F T high-order
10 Position command low-order Interpolation units
11 Position command (When the actual data is 23040000, the position
high-order command data is regarded as 360.) Same as CH1
12 Feedback position low-order Interpolation units
13 Feedback position (When the actual data is 23040000, the feedback
high-order position data is regarded as 360.)
80 Control input 1 Bit correspondence
81 Control input 2
82 Control input 3
83 Control input 4
84 Control output 1 Bit correspondence
85 Control output 2
86 Control output 3
87 Control output 4
(Note) The % of the current command and current feedback indicate 30min. rating = 100%.
III - 36
(e) Setting the output magnification

Set the output magnification in SP255 and SP256.
SP255 or SP256
DATA = actual data
256
Using the expression above,

(i) Output data other than speedometer output and load meter output carries out the D/A output
in Fig. 1.
(ii) Speedometer output data and load meter output data carries out the D/A output in Fig. 2.
D/A output voltage D/A output voltage
+10V +10V
+5V +5V
0V 0V
DATA DATA
-128 0 +127 0 +127 +255
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
(Example 1) Current command, current feedback

The data is regarded as 100% when the actual data is 4096.
Therefore, for example, the actual data is output as shown below during +120% current
feedback.
Actual data = 4096 1.2 = 4915
If "256" is set (magnification 1) in parameter SP255 (SP256), from Fig.1, the D/A output
voltage will be as shown below, exceeding the D/A output voltage maximum value.
5V + {4915 1 (5V/128)} = 197V > 10V
Therefore, if "6" is set in parameter SP255 (SP256), the D/A output voltage will become
as shown below, and data confirmation will be possible.
5V + {4915 6/256 (5V/128)} = 9.5V < 10V
III - 37
(Example 2) Speed feedback

Data unit is r/min.
Therefore, at +2000r/min, the motor speed will be output as "2000".
If "256" (magnification 1) is set in parameter SP255 (SP256), from Fig.1, the D/A output
5V + {2000 1 (5V/128)} = 83.125V > 10V
Therefore, if "16" is set in parameter SP255 (SP256), the D/A output voltage will
become as shown below, and data confirmation will be possible.
5V + {2000 16/256 (5V/128)} = 9.88V < 10V
(Example 3) Position droop

The data unit is r/min. Data is regarded as 100% when the actual data is 4096.
Therefore, for example, the actual data is output as shown below during the +0.1
position droop.
Actual data = 0.1 23040000/360 = 6400
If "256" (magnification 1) is set in parameter SP255 (SP256), from Fig.1, the D/A output
5V + {6400 1 (5V/128)} = 255V > 10V
Therefore, if "5" is set in parameter SP255 (SP256), the D/A output voltage will become
as shown below, and data confirmation will be possible.
5V + {2000 5/256 (5V/128)} = 9.88V < 10V
(Example 4) Confirm the orientation complete signal (ORCF) with the control output 4L.
The data unit is bit corresponding data.
Refer to the Instruction Manual for the meanings of the control output 4L bit
corresponding signals.
The orientation complete signal (ORCF) corresponds to the control output 4L/bit 4.
Therefore, for example, the actual data is output as shown below when ORCF= ON.
bit 4 corresponding actual data = 24 = 16
If "256" is (magnification 1) set in parameter SP255 (SP256), from Fig.1, the D/A output
voltage will be as shown below, and data confirmation will be possible.
5V + {16 1 (5V/128)} = 5.625V < 10V
Note that, if bits other than bit4 are ON, the current of that bit will be added to the
5.625V shown above, and at the actual ORCF signal measurement will be as shown
below, so confirm the changed voltage.
(5.625 V 5V) = 0.625 V
III - 38
3.3 Spindle specification parameters screen

The spindle parameters are divided into those transmitted to the spindle drive unit from the NC and
those used on the NC side.
(1) Parameters transmitted to the spindle drive unit from the NC

The 384 parameters shown in section "4.2.(1)" are those transmitted from the NC to the spindle
drive unit.
(2) Parameters used on NC side

Refer to the Toshiba Machine "TOSNUC 888.2" Instruction Manual for details on the
parameters used on the NC side.
III - 39
3.4 Spindle monitor screen

Refer to the Toshiba Machine "TOSNUC 888.2" Specifications Manual for details on this
screens and contents.
III - 40
3.5 Control input signals

(1) Speed command input
Max. speed
Speed command value
(a) When the speed command value is 0, the motor speed will be 0; and when the speed
command value is the maximum value, the motor speed will be the maximum motor speed
set in parameter SP017 (TSP).
(b) The motor will forward run and reverse run with the forward run and reverse run start
commands. (The motor will not rotate with only the speed command value.)
(2) Forward run start command (SRN)

(a) When SRN is ON, the motor will run in the counterclockwise direction (CCW) from the shaft
side according to the commanded speed.
(b) When SRN is OFF, the motor will decelerate to a stop, the transistor base interception will be
carried out and the motor will stop.
(c) The orientation movement will be a priority when the orientation command is input.
(3) Reverse run start command (SRI)

(a) When SRI is ON, the motor will run in the clockwise direction (CW) from the shaft side
according to the commanded speed.
(b) When SRI is OFF, the motor will decelerate to a stop, the transistor base interception will be
carried out and the motor will stop.
(4) Torque limit 1, 2, 3 input (TL1, TL2, TL3)

(a) The torque limit will temporarily reduce the motor output torque during mechanical spindle
orientation or gear shift, etc., and will rotate the motor.
(b) The following seven torque limit values can be used according to the combination of the TL1,
TL2 and TL3 bit inputs.
TL3 TL2 TL1 Torque limit value
0 0 1 Torque limit value (%) set with parameter SP021
0 1 0 SP049
0 1 1 SP050
1 0 0 SP051
1 0 1 SP052
1 1 0 SP053
1 1 1 SP054
(Note) % indicates the percentage to the motor 30 min. rating torque.
III - 41
(5) Orientation start command input (ORC)

(a) This is the orientation movement start signal. When ORC is ON, the orientation will start
regardless of the operation command (SRN, SRI).
(b) When ORC is OFF, the motor will start rotating at the commanded speed again if either
forward run (SRN) or reverse run (SRI) is input.
(6) Gear selection command 1, 2 input (GR1, GR2)

(a) The spindle gear step for orientation movement or various position control movements is
selected.
(b) The following four gear steps can be selected according to the combination of the GR1 and
GR2 2bit inputs.
(c) Do not change the signal while the orientation command or servo ON command is input.
GR2 GR1 Parameters used to set the gear ratio
0 0 SP025 (GRA1), SP029 (GRB1)
0 1 SP026 (GRA2), SP030 (GRB2)
1 0 SP027 (GRA3), SP031 (GRB3)
1 1 SP028 (GRA4), SP032 (GRB4)
(7) Index forward run command input (WRN), reverse run command input (WRI)
(a) This is the command input for forward run index or reverse run index during multipoint
orientation. This will be valid only when the orientation start signal is ON.
(b) The forward run index will start from the CCW direction from the motor shaft end and the
reverse run index will start from the CW direction.
(8) L coil selection command input (LCS)

(a) This is the command input signal for selecting the low-speed coil or high-speed coil when
changing the coils.
(b) The high-speed coil is selected when LCS is OFF, and the low-speed coil is selected when
LCS is ON.
(9) Sub-motor selection command input (MS)

(a) This is the command input signal for selecting the main spindle motor or sub general-purpose
motor during the 1-drive unit 2-motor specifications changeover.
(b) The main motor is selected when MS is OFF, and the sub-motor is selected when MS is ON.
(10) Cutting input (G1)

This signal determines whether cutting is being performed during C-axis control.
The operation will be determined as cutting when G1 is ON.
(11) Spindle control mode selection command 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 input (SC1, SC2, SC3, SC4, SC5)
The operation mode during spindle drive unit position control is selected with the bits.
The selections shown below are used.
SC5 SC4 SC3 SC2 SC1 Operation mode
0 1 0 0 0
Synchronous tap operation mode
~
0 1 0 1 1
0 1 1 0 0
C-axis operation mode
~
0 1 1 1 1
1 0 0 0 0
Spindle synchronous operation mode
~
1 0 0 1 1
(Note) The normal speed operation mode will be entered when bits other than
the above are selected.
III - 42
3.6 Control output signals

(1) Zero speed output signal (ZS)
(a) ZS will turn ON if the actual motor rotation speed drops below the zero speed detection point
in regard to the stop command.
(b) The signal is output when the above condition is satisfied regardless of the rotation command
(SRN, SRI).
(c) The minimum output pulse width is about 200ms.
(d) The zero speed detection speed is set with parameter SP018 (ZSP) in the range of 1 to
1000r/min.
Motor speed
Zero speed detect point:

set with parameter within range from 1 to 1000r/min
(standard: 50r/min, semi-standard: 25r/min)
Output signal
(2) Up-to-speed output signal (US)

(a) US will turn ON when the actual motor rotation speed reaches 15% of the commanded speed.
Command speed
Detection range
Output signal
(b) The signal is not output unless either SRN or SRI will turn ON.
(c) The signal can be used to verify implementation of forward run (M03) or reverse run (M04)
command.
(d) If the reverse run command will turn ON, the motor will start deceleration. The US signal will
turn OFF, and after confirming that the reached signal will turn ON, the reverse run command
will be completed.
III - 43
Forward run
Command
Reverse run
Forward run
Motor speed 0
Reverse run
Output signal
(3) Speed detection output (SD)

(a) SD will turn ON when the speed drops below the speed set in parameter SP020 (SDTS).
(b) The SD signal will turn ON when the motor speed's absolute value drops below the set
detection level regardless of the run command (SRN, SRI).
Speed detection level

Motor speed
Output signal
(4) Orientation complete output (ORCF)

ORCF will turn ON when the spindle position is currently within the in-position range set with
parameter SP004 (OINP) during orientation.
(5) Current detect output (CD)

CD will turn ON when the current value is 110% or more than the rated current.
(6) Forward run starting command output (SRNA)

This is the answer output to the forward run start command input (SRN).
(7) Reverse run starting command output (SRIA)

This is the answer output to the reverse run start command input (SRI).
(8) Torque limiting 1, 2, 3 output (TL1A, TL2A, TL3A)

This is the answer output to the torque limit 1, 2, 3 input (TL1, TL2, TL3).
(9) Orientation starting command output (ORCA)

This is the answer output to the orientation start command input (ORC).
III - 44
(10) Gear selecting command 1, 2, 3 output (GR1A, GR2A, GR3A)

This is the answer output to the gear selection command 1, 2, 3 input (GR1, GR2, GR3).
(11) Index forward run command output (WRNA), reverse run command output (WRIA)
This is the answer output to the index forward run command (WRN) and reverse run command
(WRI).
(12) L coil selection command output (LCSA)

This is the answer output to the L coil selection command input (LCS).
(13) Sub-motor selection command output (MSA)

This is the answer output to the sub-motor selection command (MS).
(14) Synchronous speed match output (SYSA)

SYSA will turn ON when the movement from the speed operation mode to the spindle
synchronous operation mode becomes possible during spindle synchronous operation.
(15) Coil changeover output (MKC)

MKC will turn ON for a set time when changing over from the L coil to the H coil or the H coil to
the L coil during coil changeover.
(16) Index positioning complete output (WRCF)

WRCF will turn ON when indexing is completed during indexing.
(17) Drive unit warning output (DWN)

DWN will turn ON when any warning occurs in the spindle drive unit.
(18) Alarm output (ALM)

ALM will turn ON when any alarm occurs in the spindle drive unit.
(19) Z-phase passed output (ZFIN)

ZFIN will turn ON when the Z-phase is passed for the first time after the servo will turn ON during
position control.
(20) Position loop in-position output (INP)

INP will turn ON when the current position is within the in-position range set with parameters
during positioning other than orientation. INP will turn OFF when the servo turns OFF.
(21) Spindle control mode selection command 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 output (SC1A, SC2A, SC3A, SC4A,
SC5A)
This is the answer output to the spindle control mode selection command 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 input (SC1,
SC2, SC3, SC4, SC5).
III - 45
3.7 Meter outputs
Speedometer
Full scale: 10V
Load meter
Full scale: 10V
(1) Speedometer output

(a) The following specification is recommended for speedometer.
(i) Model : YM-8G DC voltmeter (Mitsubishi)
(ii) Rating : 10VDC full scale
(iii) Internal impedance : About 10k
(b) +10VDC is output at the motor max speed, regardless of rotation direction.
Motor speed
Max. speed
(2) Load meter output

(a) The following specification is recommended for load meter.
(i) Model : YM-8G DC voltmeter (Mitsubishi)
(ii) Rating : 10VDC full scale
(iii Internal impedance : About 10k
(iv) Scale
Red zone
III - 46
(b) Reading of load meter is percent (%) of load to the rated motor output. The relationship
between motor output capacity [kW] and load meter reading [r/min] is as follows:
Overload zone (1 min.)

Motor output capacity (kW)
15 min.
50%ED ( ) rating
30 min. Load meter 120%
Load meter 100%
Continuous rating area Load meter

Cont. rating
100%
30 min. rating
III - 47
3.8 Output interface

Open emitter output Output transistor rating
M54630P TR array
Tolerable voltage : 24VDC or less
Tolerable current : 50mA or less (per output)
Coil changeover
output signal
Spindle/C-axis
changeover output signal
<Spindle drive unit> <MHE90K (AD converter)>
(Note 1) Connect the spindle/C-axis changeover output signal only when using the MHE90K detector.
(Note 2) The changeover circuit configuration for coil changeover is as shown below.
<Spindle drive unit> <AC spindle motor>
Control
section
The relays, contactors, cables, etc., for the spindle drive unit and AC spindle motor that are not
enclosed in the bold line must be prepared by the machine manufacturer.
The relay (RA) must be connected in parallel with the flywheel diode; and the contactors (MC1, MC2)
must be connected in parallel with the CR surge absorber coil.
During low-speed coil selection ................ connection (Turn MC1 ON, MC2 OFF)
During high-speed coil selection............... connection (Turn MC1 OFF, MC2 ON)
III - 48
4. Optional Specifications and Parts

WARNING
Always wait at least 15 minutes after turning the power OFF before connecting options or
peripheral devices. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
CAUTION
Always use the designated peripheral devices and options. Failure to observe this could lead to
faults or fires.
4.1 Orientation specifications (optional)

The following three types of orientation specifications are available:
(1) 1-point orientation using magnetic sensor
(2) 4096-point orientation using encoder
(3) 4096-point orientation using motor built-in encoder
4.1.1 1-point orientation using magnetic sensor
(1) Connection
Refer to "1.4 Configuration" for the connection of the magnetic sensor and spindle drive unit.
(2) Magnet and detection head installation direction

The magnet and detection head should be installed in the specified orientation.
Standard type and high-speed standard type

............. The center reference hole of magnet and the reference notch of detection head
should come to the same side.
Refer to CASE 1 , CASE 2 , CASE 3 and UNACCEPTABLE EXAMPLE 1 .
High-speed small type
............. The reference notch of detection head should be positioned in reference with polarity
(N, S) of magnet.
Refer to CASE 4 , CASE 5 and UNACCEPTABLE EXAMPLE 2 .
High-speed ring type
............. The reference notch of detection head should be positioned in reference with polarity
(N, S) of magnet.
Refer to CASE 6 , CASE 7 and UNACCEPTABLE EXAMPLE 3 .
CASE 1 Magnet is installed on the circumferential surface of rotating body. (Circumferential mounting)
The reference hole of magnet and the reference notch of detection head should come to
the opposite load side, as shown below.
Reference hole
Opposite Opposite
load side Load side
load side
Load side
Reference
notch View from "A"
Reference hole
Reference notch
Magnet is installed on circumferential surface of rotating body.

III - 49
CASE 2 Magnet is installed on the front or back flat surface of rotating body. (Flat mounting)
(1) When the magnet is installed on the (2) When the magnet is installed on the load
opposite load side of spindle, the reference side of spindle, the reference hole of
hole of magnet and reference notch of magnet and reference notch of detection
detection head should face inward, as head should face outward, as shown below.
shown below.
Reference Reference Reference

hole notch hole
Reference
notch
Reference Reference
Reference hole notch
View from "B" hole Reference
notch
View from "C"
Magnet is installed on the opposite load side. Magnet is installed on the load side.
CASE 3 In regard to CASE 1 , the magnet and detection head can be changed to the following
position as long as the reference hole and reference notch are aligned. With this, normal
orientation can be carried out.
(However, the parameter SP097 orientation detector installation direction bit must be
changed in this case.)
Reference hole
Reference notch
UNACCEPTABLE EXAMPLE 1
If the magnet reference hole and detection head reference notch are not aligned, intense
vibration will occur on both ends of the magnet, and orientation is impossible.
Reference hole
Reference hole
Reference notch Reference notch
III - 50
CASE 4 Magnet is installed on the circumferential surface of rotating body. (Circumferential mounting)
The detection head reference notch should be on the opposite load side and the magnet
should be installed in the polarity shown below.
Opposite Opposite
load side load side Load side
Load side
Reference View from "A"

notch
Reference notch
Magnet is installed on the circumferential surface of rotating body.
CASE 5 As long as the relation between location of the detection head reference notch and the
polarity of the magnet are aligned, the detection head and the magnet can be installed as
shown below in CASE 4 , and normal orientation can be carried out.
Opposite
load side Load side
View from "A" Reference notch
Reference notch
If the detection head reference notch is not aligned properly in reference to polarity of the
magnet, intense vibration occurs on both ends of the magnet, and orientation is impossible.
Opposite Opposite
load side Load side
load side
Load side
Reference View from "A"

notch
Reference notch
In this example, polarity (N, S) of magnet is inverse to that in CASE 4 .
III - 51
CASE 6 The detection head reference notch is on the opposite load side of spindle and the polarity
of the magnet is as shown below.
Opposite Opposite
load side Load side
load side
Load side
Reference
notch View from "A"
Reference
notch
CASE 7 As long as the relation between location of detection head reference notch and the polarity
of the magnet are aligned, the detection head and the magnet can be installed as shown
below in CASE 4 , and normal orientation can be carried out.
Opposite Opposite Load side

load side load side
Load side
View from "A" Reference notch
Reference notch
If the detection head reference notch is not aligned properly in reference to polarity of the
magnet, intense vibration occurs on both ends of the magnet, and orientation is impossible.
Opposite
load side Opposite Load side
load side
Load side
Reference
notch View from "A"
Reference
notch
In this example, polarity (N, S) of magnet is inverse to that in CASE 4 .
III - 52
Direction of rotation
Spindle
(40 to 60
Face A permissible)
Face A
Magnet
Magnet
Min. gap Max. gap
Tolerable
installation error Head
2 mm
Adjustable
range 2 mm Mounting plate
Reference notch Reference notch
Center
Center
Table 1
BKO-C1810H03 Standard BKO-C1730H06 High-speed standard
R (Radius) mm Max. gap mm Min. gap mm Max. gap mm Min. gap mm
40 11.5 0.5 2.7 0.5 10 0.5 1.22 0.5
50 9.5 0.5 2.8 0.5 8 0.5 1.31 0.5
60 8.5 0.5 3.0 0.5 7 0.5 1.5 0.5
70 8.0 0.5 3.4 0.5 7 0.5 2.38 0.5
Table 2
BKO-C1810H03 Standard BKO-C1730H06 High-speed standard
R (Radius) mm Gap mm Gap mm
40 6 0.5 5 0.5
50 6 0.5 5 0.5
60 6 0.5 5 0.5
70 6 0.5 5 0.5
Table 3
BKO-C1730H09 High-speed standard
R (Radius) mm Max. gap mm Min. gap mm
40 6.25 0.5 3.3 0.5
50 6.0 0.5 3.7 0.5
60 5.75 0.5 3.85 0.5
70 5.5 0.5 3.87 0.5
III - 53
(3) Caution on installation of magnet

When the magnet is installed to the spindle, pay attention to the following:
(a) Do not place an intense magnetic source near the magnet.
(b) Carefully handle the magnet, avoiding mechanical shock to the magnet.
(c) Secure the magnet to the spindle with M4 screws.
(d) After the magnet is installed, balance the entire spindle.
(e) Align the center of the magnet (between N and S) with the center line of the rotating disk on
the spindle.
(The position relation should be as shown in CASE 1 to CASE 7 on the previous pages.)
(f) Keep the magnet and its peripheral clean from iron particles (iron particles may cause
malfunction).
(g) Apply lock paint, or other suitable means, to prevent installation screws from becoming loose.
(h) If the magnet is installed on a ground rotating disk, demagnetize the disk.
(i) Diameter of rotating disk on which the magnet is installed should be within the range from
80mm to 120mm.
(j) If rotation speed of the spindle on which the magnet is installed exceeds 6000r/min, use a
high-speed type magnet (applicable up to 12000r/min of rotation speed). If rotation speed
exceeds 12000r/min, use a ring type magnet.
(k) When installing the magnet on a rotating body plane, keep the speed below 6,000r/min.
(4) Caution on installation of sensor

Observe the following cautions when installing the sensor.
(a) The position relation of the magnet and detection head should follow CASE 1 to CASE 7 .
(b) The center line of detection head should be in line with the center of magnet.
(c) The gap between the magnet and detection head should be as follows:
Table 1 on previous page when using standard magnet and installation CASE 1 or CASE 3
Table 1 on previous page when using high-speed standard magnet and installation
CASE 1 or CASE 3
Table 2 on previous page when using standard magnet and installation CASE 2
Table 2 on previous page when using high-speed standard magnet and installation CASE 2
Table 3 on previous page when using high-speed compact magnet and installation
CASE 1 or CASE 3
An example of the high-speed ring magnet is shown in the outline drawing in section "4.1.1 (5)".
Manufacturing a jig is recommended for mass production.
(d) Connector used in preamplifier
BKO-C1810 : Oil proof-type
BKO-C1730 : Not oil proof-type
Install both type at a place not subject to oil.
(e) The cable between the preamplifier and the controller should be laid down apart from
high-voltage cables.
(f) Check the connector wiring, securely engage the receptacle and tighten connector lock screws.
III - 54
(5) Magnetic sensor orientation parts (Optionally supplied parts)

Select the combination of the magnetic sensor parts for magnetic sensor orientation from the table
below.
Combination
Tolerable
Type Model Pre-
speed [r/min] Sensor Magnet
amplifier
Standard 0 to 6000 MAGSENSOR BKO-C1810H01 to 3 H01 H02 H03
High-speed standard 0 to 12000 MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.6 H01 H02 H06
High-speed small 0 to 12000 MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.9 H01 H02 H09
High-speed ring 0 to 25000 MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.11 H01 H02 H41
Outline dimensions:
z Preamplifier H01
2-5.5 hole
Connector (controller cable side)

Unit side : TRC116-21A10-7M
Connector (sensor side) Cable side : TRC116-12A10-7F10.5
For BKO-C1810H01, R04-R-8F is used.
For BKO-C1730H01, TRC116-21A10-7F is used.
z Sensor H02
Reference notch +100

Cable length 500
0
Connector
For BKO-C1810H02, R04-R-8M is used.
For BKO-C1730H02, TRC116-12A10-7M is used.
III - 55
z Magnet
Part Tolerable
Outline drawings
No. speed [r/min]
Mass: 40 1.5g
H03 0 to 6000 Reference hole
H06 0 to 12000 4-4.3 hole
Installation screw: M4
Mass: 14.8 0.7g
2-4.3 hole
H09 0 to 12000
N.P
Installation screw: M4
Spun ring 4-F screw
RINGFEDER
RFN8006 JK
Stainless case
Case Cover SUS-303
H41 0 to 25000
Gap 1 0.1
Sensor 2-G0.15H
H42 0 to 25000 head Stop position scale On circumference
Reference
notch Polarity (N,S) is indicated on the side wall of cover.
Detection head should be installed so that the reference notch of
sensor head comes on the case side.
Magnet DIM IN mm
H43 0 to 30000 Dimensions
Mass
Model A B C D E F G H JX L
(g)
70H7+0.030
BKO-C1730H11 105 90 28 19 M61.0 5 90 7079 1 10244
0
60H7+0.030
BKO-C1730H12 94 79 25 17 M50.8 5 79 6068 1 7684
0
50H7+0.025
BKO-C1730H13 78 66 23 15 M50.8 5 66 5057 1 4784
0
40H7+0.025
BKO-C1730H14 66 54 20 13 M40.7 5 54 4045 1 3224
0
Spindle
Reference notch
H44 0 to 30000
Case
Caution on installation of H41 to H44
G hole 1. Tolerance to shaft dimension should be "h6".
2. 2-G hole can be used for positioning of spindle
Gap L Cover and magnet.
Tolerance 3. Magnet shall be installed as shown to the left.
Spindle clamping 4. Misalignment between sensor head and magnetic
screw center line shall be within 2mm.
5. Reference notch of sensor head shall come on the
Installation of magnet case side.
III - 56
4.1.2 4096-point orientation using encoder
(1) Connection
Refer to "1.4 Configuration" for the connection of the encoder and spindle drive unit.
(2) Installation conditions
Mechanical characteristics for rotation

a. Inertia : 0.110-4kgm2 or less
b. Shaft friction torque : 0.98Nm or less
c. Shaft angle acceleration : 104rad/s2 or less
d. Tolerable speed : 7,030r/min
Mechanical configuration
a. Bearings : Non-lubricated for 100,000 hours or more rotations
(at 2,000r/min)
Non-lubricated for 20,000 hours or more at 6,000r/min
b. Shaft amplitude : 0.02mm or less at 15mm from end
c. Tolerable load : Thrust direction 10kg (5kg during operation)
Radial direction 20kg (10kg during operation)
d. Mass : 1.5kg max
e. Squareness of flange to shaft : 0.05mm or less
f. Flange matching eccentricity : 0.05mm or less
Working conditions
a. Working temperature range : -5C to +55C
b. Storage temperature range : -20C to +85C
c. Humidity range : 95% RH (at 40C) for 8 hours
d. Vibration resistance : 5 to 50Hz, total vibration width 1.5mm, each shaft for 30 min.
e. Impact resistance : 294.0m/s2 (30G)
III - 57
(3) Handling
a. Use of a flexible coupling is recommended for the coupling of the encoder and spindle shaft
in terms of improving the encoder life and performance.
b. Installation precision
The precision shown below should be secured for the encoder installation section engaging
section and installation surface sway in order to maximize the coupling life.
Encoder
Coupling
Opposite encoder
shaft side
c. Recommended coupling
Recommendation 1 Recommendation 2
Manufacturer Tokushu Seiko Eagle
Model Model M1 FCS38A
Resonance frequency 1374Hz 3515Hz
0.8 10 1.2 103
3
Position detection error
Tolerable speed 20000r/min 10000 r/min
Mis- Core deviation 0.7mm 0.16mm
alignment Angle displacement 1.5 1.5
Outline Max. length 74.5mm 33mm
dimensions Max. diameter 57mm 38mm
Refer to the coupling catalogue for details on the coupling.
III - 58
(4) Encoder orientation parts (Optionally supplied parts)

Encoder (1024p/rev)
Encoder model Tolerable speed
RFH-1024-22-1M-68 6000r/min
RFH-1024-22-1M-68-8 8000r/min
Name plate 1.15 4-5.4 hole
5
3
14.3
Key way dimensions
15g6
50g6
Encoder side
MS3102A20-29P
Cable side
MS3106A20-29S
Pin Function Pin Function

A 1chA K 0V
B 2chZ L
C 1chB M
D N 1ch A
E Case earth P 2ch Z
F R 1ch B
G S
H +5V T
J
III - 59
4.1.3 4096-point orientation using motor built-in encoder
The motor built-in encoder built-in motor with Z-phase signal is required for this specification.
This can be used only when the motor and spindle coupling is the direction coupling or when the
timing belt with a reduction ratio of 1 is used.
(1) Connection
Refer to "1.4 Configuration" for the connection of the signal wires.
(2) Installation
The encoder is built into the motor so no special detector needs to be installed.
4.1.4 Operation of orientation
(1) Operation modes

There are three modes of orientation stop. Desired mode can be selected by setting parameter
SPECO.
1. PRE :
........... (a) Spindle approaches the stop position in the direction of on-going rotation.
2. Forward orientation :
........... (b) Spindle approaches the stop position in forward direction of rotation, regardless of
direction of on-going rotation.
3. Reverse orientation :
........... (c) Spindle approaches the stop position in the reverse direction of rotation, regardless
of direction of on-going rotation.
Speed
(Fwd.)
ORC
ORCF
Speed
(Rev.)
ORC
ORCF
(2) Operation sequence

(a) When orientation command ORC is given, motor speed changes from the steady run speed
to "Position loop changeover speed" and at the same time the multi-point orientation stop
position is read.
(b) When motor speed reaches the "Position loop changeover speed", control mode changes
from speed control to positioning control (position loop gain parameter (Note 1)).
("Position loop changeover speed" is automatically set when position loop gain is specified by
parameter.)
III - 60
(c) When control mode changes, distance to the orientation stop position is calculated and the
motor is decelerated in the set pattern (specified by parameter CSP) to enter the orientation
mode.
(d) When the spindle enters the in-position range (set by parameter OINP), "oriented spindle
stop complete signal (in-position)" ORCF turns ON.
(e) The stop position zero point can be shifted by setting parameter OPST.
( f ) When orientation command (ORC) is removed, the motor is returned to the previously
specified run speed.
Motor speed
Stop position
command
(Note 1) PGM is used for the magnetic sensor and motor built-in encoder orientation and PGE is
used for the encoder orientation.
The stopping position according to the encoder installation direction is as shown below:
Case 1 Case 2
Encoder
Motor Belt
Installation
direction Arrow A Arrow A
Looking from arrow A Looking from arrow A
Forward run Reverse run Forward run Reverse run
Normal
orientation
III - 61
(3) Diagram of relation of parameters for orientation
Position control block Speed control block

is the parameter name.
From CNC
Delay advance Power
or
drive unit
Position feedback Speed feedback

Spindle motor
Encoder
Spindle
Bit 5 or Bit 0 to 2
bit 6
Magnetic sensor
III - 62
4.2 Synchronous tap function (option)

There are two types of synchronous tap.
Closed type synchronous tap
Semi-closed type synchronous tap
4.2.1 Closed type synchronous tap
A position loop can be built up with position signal from an encoder installed on spindle.
(Note that position control is carried out by configuring a position loop in the Toshiba Machine CNC
"TUSNUC 888.2".)
(1) Connection
Refer to "1.4 Configuration" for the connection of the encoder and spindle drive unit.
(2) Installation of encoder

For installation of encoder, refer to the pages related to encoder orientation.
4.2.2 Semi-closed type synchronous tap
A position loop can be built up with position signal from motor built-in encoder.
(Note that position control is carried out by configuring a position loop in the Toshiba Machine CNC
"TUSNUC 888.2".)
A special detector is not required for synchronous tap if the spindle is coupled to the motor shaft
directly or through gears.
(When belt or timing belt is used, closed type synchronous tap is applicable.)
It is also applicable to standard motor having no Z-phase control.
(1) Connection
No additional connection is required for semi-closed type synchronous tap.
4.2.3 Operation of synchronous tap
The following two operations can be used to enter the synchronous tap operation.
(1) Synchronous tap starts after zero point return
(2) Synchronous tap starts after deceleration and stop
The above operations are controlled with the CNC side, so refer to the CNC Instruction Manual.
III - 63
4.3 C-axis control (optional)
4.3.1 When using encoder (OSE90K+1024 BKO-NC6336H01)
(1) Connection
Refer to page "1.4 Configuration" for the connection of the encoder and spindle drive unit.
(2) Installation conditions
Mechanical characteristics for rotation

a. Inertia : 0.1104kgm2 or less
b. Shaft friction torque : 0.98Nm or less
c. Shaft angle acceleration : 105rad/s2 or less
d. Tolerable speed : 7,030r/min
Mechanical configuration
a. Bearings : Non-lubricated for 100,000 hours or more rotations
(at 2,000r/min)
Non-lubricated for 20,000 hours or more at 6,000r/min
b. Shaft amplitude : 0.02mm or less at 15mm from end
c. Tolerable load : Thrust direction 10kg (5kg during operation)
Radial direction 20kg (10kg during operation)
d. Mass : 2kg max
e. Squareness of flange to shaft : 0.05mm or less
f. Flange matching eccentricity : 0.05mm or less
Working conditions
a. Working temperature range : 5C to +55C
b. Storage temperature range : 20C to +85C
c. Humidity range : 95% RH (at 45C) for 8 hours
d. Vibration resistance : 5 to 50Hz, total vibration width 1.5mm, each shaft for 30 min.
e. Impact resistance : 294.0m/s2 (30G)
III - 64
(3) Handling
a. Installation of encoder
Use of a flexible coupling is recommended for the coupling of the encoder and spindle shaft
in terms of improving the encoder life and performance.
b. Installation precision
The precision shown below should be secured for the encoder installation section engaging
section and installation surface sway to secure the coupling life.
Encoder
Coupling
Opposite encoder
shaft side
c. Recommended coupling
Recommendation 1 Recommendation 2
Manufacturer Tokushu Seiko Eagle
Model Model M1 FCS38A
Resonance frequency 1374 Hz 3515 Hz
0.8 10 1.2 10-3
-3
Position detection error
Tolerable speed 20000 r/min 10000 r/min
Mis- Core deviation 0.7 mm 0.16 mm
alignment Angle displacement 1.5 1.5
Max. length 74.5 mm 33 mm
Dimensions
Max. diameter 57 mm 38 mm
Refer to the coupling catalogue for details on the coupling.
d. Cable
1) Consider the following points to allow the encoder to be used to its fullest.
A 4.5V or higher power supply must be secured for the encoder.
For example:
(i) Increase the +5V, 0V wire size.
(ii) Use two or more wires for +5V, 0V.
(iii) Keep the cable length as short as possible.
2) Others
The encoder is a precision device so do not apply strong impact, etc., to it.
Incorrect wiring will cause trouble. Always confirm the connector name and pin No., etc.,
before wiring.
III - 65
(4) C-axis control parts (Optionally supplied parts)

z Encoder OSE90K+1024 BKO-NC7337H01
4-M4 depth 6
Caution plate
Connector key way

Connector
Main unit side : MS3102A20-29P
Controller cable side : MS3102A20-29S (The connector on the controller cable side must be
prepared by the user.)
5
Note 1. The max. encoder speed must be 6000r/min or less.
Note 2. The dimensional tolerance that is not specified is
0.5mm.
3
Signal
Generated signals Remarks
1ch 1024 C/T A B-phase, A B -phase
2ch 1 C/T Z-phase Z -phase
3ch 90000 C/T C D-phase, C D -phase
4ch 1 C/T Y-phase Y B-phase
Connector pin assignment

Pin Function Pin Function
A 1ch A-phase K 0V
B 2ch Z-phase L 3ch C -phase
C 1ch B-phase M 3ch D -phase
D N 1ch A -phase
E Case grounding P 2ch Z -phase
F 3ch C-phase R 1ch B -phase
G 3ch D-phase S 4ch Y-phase
+5%
H +5V DC 10% T 4ch Y -phase
J 0V
z Grounding plate and cable clamp fittings

Refer to "5.4 Single parts (optionally supplied parts)".
III - 66
4.3.2 When using built-in encoder (MBE90K)
Refer to the MBE90K (built-in C-axis encoder) Specifications and Instruction Manual [BNP-A2993-41].
4.3.3 When using built-in encoder (MHE90K)
Refer to the MHE90K (built-in C-axis encoder) Specifications and Instruction Manual [BNP-A2993-44].
III - 67
4.4 Single parts (optionally supplied parts)

4.4.1 Power step-down transformer
When available power supply is at 400V, use this optional step-down transformer.
(1) 12-23kVA (ITEM1 to 3)
HV & LV Terminal
Bolt Size : M8
Capacity Dimensions Mass

ITEM Remarks
(kVA) A (kg)
1 12 230 90 7.5K
2 17 175 115 11K
3 23 215 130 15K
Name Plate
Ventilation Window
(With Right & Left, Backside)
4-M5 Thread
Lifting Eye Bolt
DIA Hole : 62
Earthing Terminal
Bolt Size : M6
Name Plate
Terminal Board
Front Cover
(Removable)
Setting Base
(DIA Holes "M12K")
III - 68
(2) 30kVA to 75kVA (ITEM4 to 8)
HV Terminal
Bolt Size : G
LV Terminal
Bolt Size : G
Capacity Dimensions Mass

ITEM Remarks
(kVA) A B C D E F G (kg)
4 30 535 395 625 460 250 445 M12 165 18.5K
5 37 535 395 665 460 250 485 M12 185 22K, 26K
6 44 535 425 665 460 265 485 M12 205 30K
7 60 625 425 815 540 255 625 M16 280 37K
8 75 625 425 840 540 270 650 M16 320 45K
Name Plate
4-M5 Thread
Terminal Window
Lifting
Eye Bolt Cover For Connecting
Terminal
Earthing Terminal (Removable)
(Bolt Size : M16)
Terminal
Board
Setting Base
(DIA Hole "M12")
III - 69
4.4.2 Noise filter
(1) Selection
If radio noise must be reduced, select a noise filter from the following table according to the power
supply unit model:
MDS-C1-CV- Noise filter name (Tohoku Kinzoku)
37 LF-330
55 LF-340
75 LF-350
110 LF-360
150, 185 LF-380K
220, 260, 300 Two LF-380K units in parallel
(2) Noise filter installation position

Insert the noise filter in the unit input.
Power distribution box

CB
Power supply unit Connect to the transformer input

Power supply Noise filter in power supply units that use the
(MDS-C1-CV) transformer.
(3) Specifications
Tested voltage Insulation
resistance Leakage current Working
Rated voltage Rated current AC 1 min. (V)
Name (mA) temperature
AC/DC (V) AC/DC (A) Between case (M)
250V 60Hz range (C)
terminals 500VDC
330 200V 30A 1500 > 300 <1 20 to +55
340 200V 40A 1500 > 300 <1 20 to +45
350 200V 50A 1500 > 300 <1 20 to +45
360 200V 60A 1500 > 300 <1 20 to +45
380K 200V 80A 2000 > 300 <5 25 to +55
III - 70
(4) Shape and dimensions
LF-300 Series
IN
rating
nameplate
Part name A B C D E F G H I
LF-330 180 170 60 29 120 135 150 35 65
LF-340 180 160 50 30 200 220 240 40 80
LF-350 180 160 50 30 200 220 240 40 80
LF-360 200 180 60 30 300 320 340 50 100
(mm)
LF-K Series
Name Terminal plate A B C D E F G H

LF-380K TE-K22 M6 670 400 560 380 500 170 96.5 6.5
III - 71
4.5 Other optional specifications

Refer to the following optional specifications for each model shown below for optional specifications
not explained in this manual.
Title of optional specifications Specifications No.

(1) MDS-B/C1-SP Series coil changeover function optional specifications BNP-A2993-23
III - 72
4.6 Theoretical acceleration and deceleration times

In the calculation described below, load torque is assumed to be zero. Therefore, acceleration and
deceleration times determined here somewhat differ from actual acceleration and deceleration times.
(1) Definition
P0
N (r/min)
(Note) 1) "P0" is (Rated power 1.2).

Example : For spindle of 2.2/3.7kW,
P0 = 3700 1.2 = 4440 (W)
2) GD2 = (Motor GD2) + (Motor shaft conversion load GD2) (kgm2)
(2) Acceleration/deceleration time "t"

(a) Constant torque zone 2
1.03 GD2 N12 Example: GD L = 0.123kgm2
t1 = 375 P0 (s) For motor SJ-N3.7A
2
From specification 2, GD M = 0.021kgm2
(b) Constant output (power) zone thus, GD2 = 0.021 + 0.123 = 0.144 kgm2
1.03 GD2 (N22 N12)
t2 = (s) 1.03 0.144 15002
2 375 P0 t1 = = 0.200 (s)
375 3700 1.2
2 2
(c) Reduced output zone 1.03 0.144 (6000 1500 )
1.03 GD2 (N33 N23) t2 = = 1.503 (s)
t3 = 2 375 3700 1.2
3 375 P0 N2 3 3
1.03 0.144 (8000 6000 )
t3 = = 1.465 (s)
Therefore, acc./dec. time t (0 N3) is, 3 375 3700 1.2 6000
t = t1 + t2 + t3 (s)
Acc./dec. time for 0 8000r/min
t = 0.200 + 1.503 + 1.465 = 3.168 (s)
Unit conversion :
2
Speed : 1r/min = rad/s
60
Output (power) : 1kW = 1/1.3596HP
Formula :
N
P = T0 = (2 )T
60
P : Output [W]
: Angular velocity [rad/s]
T0 : Torque [Nm]
N : Speed [r/min]
T : Torque [Nm]
III - 73
IV. Maintenance
MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle System
Configuration Section
1. Starting up the System

1.1 Startup procedures
WARNING
1. Provide Class 3 grounding or higher for the spindle amplifier and spindle motor.
2. Do not operate the switches with wet hands. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
3. Do not turn the power ON with the front cover removed. The high voltage terminals and charged
sections will be exposed, and could result in electric shocks.
CAUTION
1. Correctly connect the spindle amplifier and spindle motor power phases (U, V, W). Failure to do
so could result in abnormal operation of the spindle motor.
2. Apply only the designated voltage on each terminal. Failure to observe this could result in
ruptures or faults.
3. Turn the spindle amplifier power OFF if the spindle amplifier fails. Fires could start if a large
current continues to flow.
4. Cut off the power with the error signal. The regenerative resistor could abnormally overheat and
ignite due to a fault in the regenerative transistor, etc.
5. Check each parameter before starting operation. Unpredictable movements could result
6. The spindle amplifier cooling fins, regenerative resistor unit and spindle motor, etc., will be hot
during operation and for a short time after operation is stopped. Touching these sections could
result in burns.
The procedures for starting up the entire system are explained in this section.
Refer to each Unit Section for details on adjusting the individual units.
(1) Connect the units as shown in the connection drawing. (Refer to I. MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle System
Configuration Section, 4. Connection of Each Unit.) Observe the precautions given on pages i to v
and Chapters I to III when installing each unit and motor.
(2) Set each unit's rotary switch.
(3) Check the wiring and input voltage, etc. Turn the power ON with READY OFF or in the emergency
stop state, and confirm that each unit's LED display is correct. (Refer to the next page.)
(4) Check the personal computer or spindle drive unit LED to confirm that the parameters are set as
specified. (Refer to III. MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle Drive Unit Section, 3. Status Display and Parameter
Settings, etc., for details on the parameter meanings and setting methods.)
(5) Release the emergency stop, turn READY ON, and make adjustments according to each Unit
Section.
* Setting the rotary switch

1) (a) Power supply unit
Setting 0: Contactor installed
1: Contactor not installed
(b) Resistance regeneration converter unit
Always set "0".
2) Spindle drive unit
Usually set to "0" when starting up.
IV - 1
1.2 Status display with 7-segment LED
The status can be displayed on the 7-segment LED on the power supply and spindle drive unit when the
power is turned ON.
MDS-A/B-CVpower supply unit

MDS-A-CR Resistance MDS-A/B-SPA
regeneration type power supply spindle drive unit
24VDC ON (3 200/230VAC is ON 3 200/230VAC ON
only when using resistance
regeneration converter)
Initializing Initializing
Waiting for
READY ON
Alarm No. display at Waiting for

alarm occurrence READY
ON Emergency
Alarm display stop
during alarm
READY ON
(When the
parameter error
READY ON AL37 occurs, the Waiting for
alarm No. and servo ON
parameter No. are
displayed.)
Servo ON
Normal operation
Normal operation
Reset
Reset or
emergency stop
IV - 2
2. Adding and Replacing Units and Parts
WARNING
Wait at least ten minutes after turning the 200V power supply OFF and confirm that the CHARGE
lamp on the power supply unit has turned OFF before adding or replacing units and parts.
Failure to observe this could result in spindle amplifier damage or electric shock faults.
CAUTION
1. Correctly transport the product according to its mass. Failure to observe this could result in injury.
2. Do not stack the product above the indicated limit.
3. Install the product on non-combustible material. Installation directly on or near combustible
materials could result in fires.
4. When installing, always observe this manual and install on a place which can withstand the mass.
5. Do not get on the product, or place heavy objects on it. Failure to observe this could result in
injury.
6. Use the product within the designated environment conditions.
7. Do not allow conductive matters such as screws or metal pieces, or combustible matters such as
oil enter the spindle amplifier or spindle motor.
8. Do not block the spindle amplifier or spindle motors intake/outtake ports. Failure to observe this
could result in faults.
9. The spindle amplifier and spindle motor are precision devices. Do not drop them or apply strong
impacts.
10. Do not install or operate a spindle amplifier or spindle motor that is damaged or missing parts.
11. Consult with the Service Center or Service Station when storing the spindle amplifier for a long
time.
2.1 Replacing the unit
CAUTION
1. Do not hold the front cover when transporting the spindle amplifier. The amplifier could drop and
cause injury.
2. Always observe the installation direction. Failure to do so could result in faults.
3. Provide the specified distance between the spindle amplifier and inner surface of the control
panel and between other devices. Failure to do so could result in faults.
4. The spindle amplifier cooling fins, regenerative resistor and spindle motor, etc., will be hot during
operation and for a short time after operation is stopped. Touching these sections could result in
burns.
Replace the units with the following procedures.
1) Replacing the power supply unit.

(a) Disconnect the connectors connected to CN4 and 9.
(b) Disconnect each wire connected to L1, L2, L3, , L+, L, L11, L21 and MC1 on the terminal
block.
(c) Remove the two screws fixing the unit onto the control panel, and remove the unit from the
control panel.
(d) Install the new unit following the reversal procedures in reverse.
(e) Check the rotary switch settings.
IV - 3
2) Replacing the resistance regeneration converter

(a) Disconnect the connectors connected to CN4 and 22.
(b) Disconnect each wire connected to L1, L2, L3, , L+, L-, C, MC1 and MC2 on the terminal
block.
(c) Remove the two (four) screws fixing the unit onto the control panel, and remove the unit from
the control panel.
(d) Install the new unit following the reversal procedures in reverse.
(e) Check the rotary switch settings.
3) Replacing the spindle drive unit

(a) Save the parameters for the fault drive unit with a personal computer, or write the parameters
for the faulty amplifier in the Appendix 1 Parameter Setting list.
(b) Disconnect the connectors connected to CN4, 5, 6, 8A, 9A, 10, 11 and 12.
(c) Disconnect the wires connected to U, V, W, , L+, L, L11 and L21 on the terminal block.
(d) Remove the two (four) screws fixing the unit onto the control panel, and remove the unit from
the control panel.
(e) Install the new unit following the reversal procedures in reverse.
(f) Set the parameters, and adjust the speed, speedometer and load meter. When using magnetic
sensor orientation, confirm and adjust the orientation stop position.
Note) Install the same type of unit as the faulty unit. For the spindle drive unit, make sure that all parts,
including the options, are the same type.
IV - 4
[Appearance drawing]
1) Power supply unit 2) Spindle drive unit
B-CV-37 to 185 B-CV-220 to 300 B-SPT-04 to 185 B-SPT-220 to 300

C1-CV-37 to 185 C1-CV-220 to 370 C1-SPT-04 to 185 C1-SPT-220 to 370
CHARGE lamp CHARGE lamp CHARGE lamp
IV - 5
2.2 Unit fan

The fan life is approximately five years under normal conditions (the life is affected by the usage state
and environment). Use the following procedure to replace the fan.
(1) MDS-B Series

[Replacement method]
1. Turn the 200/230VAC input power's NF OFF, wait for the power supply unit's CHARGE lamp to
go out, and then remove the unit.
2. Remove the two installation screws on the bottom of the cooling fins.
3. Disconnect the connectors from the back of the unit, and replace the fan.
Remove these two screws

Disconnect the connector from the units
(2) MDS-C1 Series

[Replacement method]
1. Turn the 200/230VAC input power's NF OFF, wait for the power supply unit's CHARGE lamp to
go out, and then remove the unit.
2. Remove the fan guard from the back of the unit, and remove the two fan installation screws.
3. Remove the rubber bushing from the fan drive wire, and pull out the connected connector.
4. Disconnect the connected connector, and replace the fan.
Remove these
two screws
Remove the rubber bushing Pull out the connected connector,

and disconnect the connector
IV - 6
3. Daily Maintenance
WARNING
1. Wait at least ten minutes after turning the 200V power supply OFF and confirm that the CHARGE
lamp on the power supply unit (resistance regeneration converter unit) has turned OFF before
starting maintenance or inspections.
2. Only qualified technician must carry out the maintenance and inspections. Work carried out by
other personnel could result in electric shocks. Contact your nearest Service Center or Service
Station for repairs and part replacement.
3.1 Maintenance tools
Notice Never perform a megger test (insulation resistance measurement) on the spindle amplifier.
(1) Measuring instruments

The following measuring instruments are required to confirm that the power is correctly supplied to
the spindle amplifier, and that the spindle amplifier is correctly wired, etc.
Instrument Condition
Tester Check that the wires to the spindle amplifier are
correctly wired before turning the power ON.
Oscilloscope Use for general-purpose measurements and
troubleshooting
AC voltmeter Measure the AC power Measure the AC power voltage supplied to the
voltage. spindle amplifier.
Tolerable difference is 2%
or less.
DC voltmeter Maximum scale 10V, 30V, Use to measure the DC power voltage and
450V voltage across PN.
Tolerable difference is 2%
or less.
Note) A digital voltmeter may be used instead of the AC voltmeter, DC voltmeter and tester.
(2) Tools
Screwdrivers (Phillips: large, medium, small, flat-tip: small)
3.2 Periodic inspections

The unit is a stationary type, but the unit's built-in fan and additional cooling fan must be inspected
periodically.
The spindle motor does not required maintenance. However, periodically check that there is no
abnormal noise, abnormal vibration or clogging at the motor cooling fan, etc.
IV - 7
Recommended periodic inspection items

Inspection
Item Inspection details Remedies
frequency
Cooling fan Monthly 1. Does the fan rotate lightly by hand? Clean or replace the
(unit built-in fan), and 2. Does the fan rotate correctly when fan
Additional cooling fan the power is turned ON?
(outside unit) 3. Is the fan contaminated with dirt or
oil?
4. Is there any abnormal noise from the
bearings?
Terminal block screws Periodically 1. Are any of the screws loose? Tighten the screws
2. Are any of the screws contaminated Clean
with dirt or oil?
Cable and connector Periodically 1. Are any cables damaged or nicked, Replace the cable
etc.?
2. Are any connectors loose? Tighten the
connectors
Motor Noise/ Monthly Is there any abnormal noise or
vibration vibration?
Temperature Monthly Is the motor's bearings or frame hot
when touched?
Insulation Twice/year Is the insulation resistance 1M or more
when measured with a 500V megger
tester?
(Disconnect any wires connected to the
spindle drive unit before measuring.)
Cooling fan Monthly 1. Does the fan rotate correctly when Clean or replace the
the power is turned ON? fan, or clean the finger
2. Is the fan contaminated with dirt or guard
oil?
3. Is the finger guard clogged with dirt
or oil?
4. Is there any abnormal noise from the
bearings?
IV - 8
4. Maintenance Parts
4. Maintenance Parts
Applicable Manu- Replace

No. Part Type unit facturer Quantity -ment Remarks
interval
1 Fan VFA-4018-BH20 B-CV-37
(built into BKO-NC6855H01 55
unit) 75
B-SPT-22
37
VFA-8018-BH20 B-SPT-55
BKO-NC6855H02 75
110
(new type)
S80D22-TW B-CV-110
BKO-NC6855H11 B-SPT-110 Style 1
(old type) Electronics
S92B22-TW B-CV-150
BKO-NC6855H12 185
B-SPT-150
185
S12D22-TW B-CV-220 The fan life will
BKO-NC6855H13 260 vary according
300 to the usage
B-SPT-220 environment
260 and conditions.
300 5 years
* The additional
MMF-09C24TS- C1-CV-150 1 cooling fan is
RN4 185 prepared by
BKO-NC533H14 C1-CV-220 the
260 manufacturer.
2
300
370
C1-SP/H-150
185
220 2
260S
300S Melco
Technorex
MMF-06F24ES- C1-CV-110 1
RN5 C1-SP/H-55
BKO-NC5332H12 75 2
110
150S
C1-SP/H-260 4
300
MMF-04C24DS- C1-SP/H-22
ROE 37 2
BKO-NC5332H11
2 AC reactor B-AL-7.5K Mitsubishi Depends on At fault
-11K Electric system
configuration
-18.5K
-30K
-37K
3 Contactor Depends on power Mitsubishi Depends on At fault
system
supply unit Electric configuration
4 NFB Depends on power Mitsubishi Depends on At fault
supply unit Electric system
configuration
IV - 9
5. Selection of Leakage Breaker
5. Selection of Leakage Breaker

As a PWM-controlled higher harmonic chopper current flows into the spindle motor, the leakage current
is higher than a motor operated with commercial power. When installing a leakage breaker as indicated
below, make sure to ground both the drive unit and motor.
MDS spindle
system
200/230VAC
Inverter device 1 Motor
Inverter device 2
Machine power distribution box
The commercial frequency element of the leakage current in the MDS-B Series spindle system is
approx. 6mA per spindle motor. However, when selecting the leakage breaker, calculate this as max.
15mA per spindle motor in consideration of the motor power cable length, distance from grounding and
motor size, etc.
If other inverter devices are connected on the same power line, consider the leakage current for these
devices when selecting the leakage breaker, and install these at the section shown with A above.
Note that a leakage breaker (inverter compatible) that removes the higher harmonic elements with a
filter and detects only the leakage current in the commercial frequency range (approx. 50 to 60Hz) must
be selected.
Incorrect operations may take place if a breaker that is too sensitive to the higher harmonic elements is
used.
(Note) When there is one spindle, and the total current leakage of devices on the same power line is
7mA
15mA + 7mA = 22mA
Select the leakage breaker so that this calculated value is within the rated non-operating sensitivity
current.
When using a leakage tester to check faults such as malfunctioning of the leakage breaker, select a
tester that is not easily affected by the higher harmonics, and set the measurement range to 50 to 60Hz.
Example) SOUKOU Electric LC-30F
(Note) Always ground the machine with Class 3 or higher grounding for safety purposes.
IV - 10
6. Noise Filter
6. Noise Filter
If noise is a problem, especially with AM radio broadcasts, due to the electromagnetic wave noise
generated from the motor and spindle drive unit, install radio noise filter to reduce the noise.
Use this filter as needed.
Refer to III. MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle Drive Unit Section, "4.4.2 Noise filter" for details on the selection
method, installation position and outline, etc.
IV - 11
V. Maintenance
MDS-B-CVE/MDS-C1-CV
Power Supply Section
1. Troubleshooting
1. Troubleshooting
1.1 Status display
WARNING
1. Provide Class 3 grounding or higher for the spindle amplifier and spindle motor.
2. Do not touch the switches with wet hands. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
3. Do not operate the unit with the front cover removed. The high voltage terminals and charged
sections will be exposed, and can cause electric shocks.
CAUTION
1. Check and adjust each program and parameter before starting operation. Failure to do so could
lead to unforeseen operation of the machine.
2. The spindle amplifier cooling fins, regenerative resistor and spindle motor, etc., will be hot
The power supply unit's status is displayed on the power supply unit's 7-segment LED. When an alarm
occurs, the alarm No. is displayed on the 7-segment LED of the spindle drive unit connected with the
communication cable (CN4).
(1) 7-segment display

The power supply unit's status is displayed with the 7-segment LED on the top of the power supply
unit. The alarm code flickers when an alarm or warning occurs. The display is not an alarm if it is not
flickering.
7-segment display Details

Ready OFF Until the emergency stop is canceled after 200VAC
b
(24VDC) is turned ON.
Servo OFF Changes to display d approx. one second after
C
emergency stop is canceled.
Servo ON Indicates that the emergency stop is canceled and
d
operation is possible.
* : Flicker Indicates that an alarm or warning is occurring.
(Note) Alarm display code (This display code differs from the alarm No.)
V-1
1. Troubleshooting
[Operation] a: The base interception is carried out for the spindle drive unit, the external contactor
turns OFF, and the spindle motor coasts to a stop.
b: Only a warning is displayed. Operation continues.
[Resetting methods] AR : Reset by turning the power supply unit power OFF and ON.
PR : Reset by turning the NC power OFF and ON.
NR : Reset with the NC reset key.
List of power supply alarms and warnings

LED Model displaying
Alarm Ope- Resetting
dis- alarms Meaning Detection timing
No. ration method
play B-CV C1-CV
61 1 Power module overcurrent Always after power ON a PR
62 2 Frequency error Always after power ON a PR
63 3 Auxiliary regeneration error Always after power ON a PR
64 4 Not used
65 5 Rush relay error At Ready OFF Ready ON a PR
66 6 Not used
67 7 Open phase At Ready OFF Ready ON a PR
68 8 Watch dog Always after power ON a AR
69 9 Ground fault At Ready OFF Ready ON a PR
6A A Contactor melting During Ready OFF a PR
6B b Rush relay melting During Ready OFF a PR
6C c Main circuit error At Ready OFF Ready ON a PR
6E E Memory error Immediately after power ON a AR
A/D converter error/ Immediately after power ON/
6F F a AR
Power supply error always
70 G Not used
Instantaneous stop/
71 H During Ready ON a NR
External emergency stop
72 i Not used
PR
73 J Over-regeneration Always after power ON a
(Note 1)
NR
75 L Overvoltage Always after power ON a
(Note 2)
76 M At power ON a AR
setting error
77 N Power module overheat Always after power ON a AR
Auxiliary regeneration
E8 O Always after power ON b
frequency over
E9 P Instantaneous warning During Ready ON b
EA Q At power ON b
input
EB R Over-regeneration warning Always after power ON b
(Note 1) Alarm "73" occurs to prevent operation from being resumed immediately after an
over-regeneration state. Thus, it cannot be reset unless 15 minutes or more have passed
from the start of the control current (L11, L21) after the alarm occurs. Immediately after the
alarm occurs, it cannot be reset even if the NC power or control power is turned OFF and ON.
If the power is turned ON again after the alarm occurrence, wait at least 15 minutes in the
power ON state, and then turn it ON again.
(Note 2) The voltage across L+ and L- is higher than the power voltage immediately after alarm "75"
occurs. If the alarm is reset in this state, other alarms could occur.
Wait at least 5 minutes after alarm "75" occurs before resetting it.
V-2
1. Troubleshooting
1.2 Troubleshooting according to power supply alarm
CAUTION
To reset the alarm, remove the cause, confirm that the run signal is not input and ensure the
surrounding safety. Then, reset the alarm and resume operation.
If an alarm occurs in the spindle amplifier, the base interception will be carried out and the motor will
coast to a stop. Set an external sequence that turns the power OFF.
To reset the alarm, remove the cause, and then turn the power OFF and ON or turn the alarm reset
signal ON and OFF.
(1) Alarm No. 61 Power module overcurrent
[Meaning] An overcurrent was detected in the power supply's Operation unit

power module. B-CV C1-CV
[Detection] Always after power ON
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies

1 Check the state of the operation when The alarm occurs each time immediately Replace the unit.
the alarm occurs, and check the after 200VAC is turned ON and the servo
repeatability. is turned ON.
The alarm occurs frequently during servo Investigate item 3, and take measures.
ON.
The alarm occurs when the motor is
decelerating.
The alarm occurs after continuous Investigate item 2, and take measures.
operation for a long time.
The unit is hot.
2 Check the load state of all motors, and The total of all motor loads exceeds the Lower the motor load and operation
the starting/stopping frequency. power supply rated capacity. frequency.
The total does not exceed the capacity. Investigate item 3, and take measures.
3 Investigate whether the power is
correct.
(1) Is the specified power capacity The power capacity is insufficient. Increase the power capacity.
ensured?
(2) Using a tester, check whether the The voltage drops below 170V. Increase the power capacity.
voltage is 170V or more even during The voltage is 170V or more. Investigate item (3), and take
motor acceleration/deceleration. measures.
(3) Monitor the power voltage with an 1. Voltage waveform distortion Eliminate the wave distortion.
oscilloscope (also during 1. Increase the power capacity, or
acceleration/deceleration). increase the power cable size.
2. Improve the other semiconductor
device in which waveform distortion
is occurring.
(Additionally install an AC reactor,
etc.)
2. When there is a local drop
3. Other waveform or frequency

abnormality
Using a tester, measure the voltage The voltage difference across each wire is Improve the power phase balance.
across the R-S, S-T and T-R wires. 10V or more.
Nothing applies. Investigate item 4, and take measures.
4 Investigate the installation environment. The grounding is incomplete. Correctly ground.
Is the product correctly grounded? The alarm occurs easily when a specific Take measures for the device described
Are there any noise-generating devices device operates. on the left.
in the area? No problem. Replace the unit.
V-3
1. Troubleshooting
(2) Alarm No. 62 Frequency error
[Meaning] The input power frequency exceeded the specified Operation unit
range. B-CV C1-CV

1 Check the state of the operation when The alarm occurs each time immediately Investigate item 2.
the alarm occurs, and check the after the power is turned ON.
repeatability. The alarm occurs occasionally regardless
of the operation state.
The alarm occurs only while the motor is Investigate item 3.
accelerating/decelerating.
2 Measure the power voltage during The frequency is deviated from 50Hz3% Review the power facilities.
normal operation. or 60Hz3%.
The frequency deviates from 50Hz3% or
60Hz3% in some cases due to a
fluctuation in frequency.
The voltage waveform dips at some Take measures for the problem causing
sections. power unit or device. (Add an AC
reactor, etc.)
The frequency is 50Hz3% or 60Hz3%. Replace the unit.
No problem. Investigate item 4.
3 Measure the power voltage during The frequency greatly fluctuates during Review the power facilities.
motor acceleration/deceleration. acceleration/deceleration.
The voltage waveform during deceleration Take measures for the problem causing
dips in some section. power unit or device. (Add an AC
reactor, etc.)
No problem. Investigate item 4.
4 Investigate the installation The grounding is incomplete. Correctly ground.
environment. The alarm occurs easily when a specific Provide noise measures for the devices
device operates. causing the problem on the left.
No problem. Replace the unit.
(3) Alarm No. 63 Auxiliary regeneration error
[Meaning] The auxiliary regenerative resistor in the power Operation unit

supply stays ON. B-CV C1-CV

1 Check whether the regenerative Cutting oil or oil mist is adhered on the Take measures so that cutting oil and
resistance unit on the back of the unit regenerative resistance unit. dust do not contact the fins on the back
is dirty. of the unit. Then, investigate item 2, and
take measures.
The resistor is not dirty. Replace the unit.
2 Using a tester, confirm the conductivity There is continuity. Replace the unit.
between the terminal unit (L+, L, L1, The resistance value is . Clean the resistor or fins, and take
L2, L3) and resistor surface. measures so that oil and dust do not
come in contact. Monitor the state.
If the alarm recurs, replace the unit.
V-4
1. Troubleshooting
(4) Alarm No. 65 Rush relay error
[Meaning] The relay for the rush resistance short-circuit in the Operation unit
power supply does not turn ON. B-CV C1-CV
[Detection] At Ready OFF Ready ON

1 Investigate the repeatability. The alarm occurs each time READY is Replace the unit.
turned ON.
The alarm occurs occasionally. Investigate item 2, and take measures.
environment. The alarm occurs easily when a specific Take measures for the device described
Is the product correctly grounded? device operates. on the left.
Are there any noise-generating No problem. Replace the unit.
devices in the area?
(5) Alarm No. 67 Phase failure

Operation unit
[Meaning] One-phase of the 3 200VAC input is not connected B-CV C1-CV

1 Using a tester, check the voltage of There are phases with no voltage. Correctly supply the power.
each input phase. All phases are normal. Investigate items 3 and 4 for alarm 71
(instantaneous power failure).
(6) Alarm No. 68 Watch dog

Operation unit
[Meaning] The power supply software process did not end B-CV C1-CV
within the specified time.

turned ON.
The alarm occurs occasionally. Investigate item 2.
V-5
1. Troubleshooting
(7) Alarm No. 69 Ground fault

Operation unit
[Meaning] Motor ground fault B-CV C1-CV

1 Using a megger tester, measure the 100k or less. Motor fault or cable ground fault.
insulation between the UVW terminals Replace the motor or cable.
and grounding of all motors. Investigate item 2, and take measures.
100k or more.
2 Does oil come in contact with motor or Oil has come in contact. Take measures so that oil does not
cable? come in contact. Clean the motor's
cannon connector and the inside of the
terminal box. Monitor the state. If the
alarm recurs, investigate item 3 and
take measures.
Oil has not come in contact. Investigate item 3, and take measures.
3 Measure the insulation again. 1M or less. Replace the motor or cable.
More than 1M Replace the unit.
(8) Alarm No. 6A External contactor melting

Operation unit
[Meaning] The external contactor turned ON even when Ready
was OFF. B-CV C1-CV
[Detection] During Ready OFF

1 Is a contactor installed externally? A contactor is not installed externally. Set the power supply rotary switch
(SW1) to 1.
A contactor is installed externally. Investigate item 2, and take measures.
2 Is the contactor melted? Alarm 6A occurs. Investigate item 3, and take measures.
Disconnect the contactor excitation Alarm 6A does not occur. Investigate item 4, and take measures.
wire, and start up.
3 Does an error (power module error, An error is occurring. Remove the cause of the alarm on the
etc.) occur on the driver side before driver side, and then replace the
alarm 6A? contactor.
An error is not occurring. Replace the contactor.
4 Is the contactor exciting wire correctly The connection is incorrect. Wire correctly as shown below.
passed through the MC1-L11
terminals?
Power
supply
EMG switch, etc.
The connection is correct. Replace the unit.
V-6
1. Troubleshooting
(9) Alarm No. 6B Rush relay melted

Operation unit
[Meaning] The relay for the rush resistance short-circuit in the
power supply stays ON. B-CV C1-CV
[Detection] During Ready OFF

1 Investigate the repeatability. The alarm occurs each time the power is Investigate item 3, and take measures.
turned ON.
The alarm occurs sometimes. Investigate item 2, and take measures.
3 Does an error (power module error, An error is occurring. Remove the cause of the alarm on the
etc.) occur on the driver side before driver side, and then replace the power
alarm 6B? supply unit.
An error is not occurring. Replace the unit.
(10) Alarm No. 6C Main circuit error

Operation unit
[Meaning] The charging operation to the main circuit is not
correct. B-CV C1-CV

1 Check the CHARGE lamp ON state The CHARGE lamp remains ON for some Replace the unit.
when the alarm occurs. time.
The lamp turns ON instantly, but when the Investigate item 2, and take measures.
alarm occurs and the contactor turns OFF,
the lamp turns OFF immediately.
The lamp never turns ON. Investigate item 2, take measures, and
then replace the unit.
2 Disconnect the L+ and L- terminal (1) The power supply unit side is Replace the unit.
block wiring, and check the following abnormal.
resistance value with a tester. (2) The spindle drive unit side is abnormal. Review the PN wiring, and investigate
Spindle drive Spindle drive
the spindle drive unit.
Power
unit (2) unit (1) supply unit (1) and (2) are both normal. Replace the unit.
Tester measurement Correct

(2)
point resistance Faulty
value
L+ (1) + -
Approx. Short-circuit or
L L+ L-
Power supply 100 infinite
side Short-circuit or
L- L+ Infinite
several 100
Approx. Short-circuit or
L+ L-
Spindle drive 100 infinite
Disconnect only power supply's L+ side Short-circuit or
and L- wires. L- L+ Infinite
several 100
Using a tester, measure the resistance
value at (1) and (2).
V-7
1. Troubleshooting
(12) Alarm No. 6E Memory error

Operation unit
[Meaning] Abnormality in power supply memory circuit B-CV C1-CV
[Detection] Immediately after power ON

turned ON.
(13) Alarm No. 6F A/D converter error/Power supply error
[Meaning] Abnormality in power supply's A/D converter, or

spindle drive unit detected an abnormality in the Operation unit
power supply. B-CV C1-CV
[Detection] Immediately after power ON (A/D converter
abnormality)/always (power supply abnormality)

1 Check the power supply's 7-segment "F" is flickering. A/D converter abnormality.
LED display. Use the same remedy as the alarm 6E
memory error.
Another alarm code is flickering. Refer to the section for each alarm.
0 stays displayed Investigate item 2, and take measures.
F stays displayed Investigate item 2, and take measures.
8 stays displayed Refer to the alarm 68 watch dog alarm
item.
b, c and d stay displayed Investigate item 3, and take measures.
Something else is displayed. Use the same remedy as the alarm 68
watch dog alarm.
2 Check the rotary switch settings. For MDS-A-CV: 0 or 1 Replace the unit.
For MDS-B-CV: 0, 1, 4, 5
For MDS-A-CR: 0
A value other than the above is set. Correctly set the rotary switch.
3 Check the wiring of the driver The wiring is incorrect. Replace the cable.
communication cable. The cable is not shielded.
The wiring is OK. Investigate item 4, and take measures.
4 Try replacing the communication cable OK after replacement. Cable fault
connected with the driver. NG even after replacement. Replace the unit.
V-8
1. Troubleshooting
(14) Alarm No. 71 Instantaneous power failure/ external emergency stop

Operation unit
[Meaning] The external contactor turned OFF. An
instantaneous power failure occurred for 25ms or B-CV C1-CV
longer.
[Detection] During Ready ON

1 Investigate the sequence to check The contactor is OFF. The power supply operates normally.
whether the contactor has been turned Check the machine sequence. When
OFF with an emergency stop button, directly turning OFF the contactor with
etc. the emergency stop button and NC
emergency stop is applied
simultaneously with the contactor OFF,
emergency stop will occur instead of an
alarm.
The contactor is not OFF. Investigate item 2, and take measures.
2 Investigate the state of occurrence. The alarm occurs each time READY is Investigate item 3, and take measures.
turned ON.
The alarm occurs at a certain operation. Investigate item 1 again.
If there is no abnormality, investigate
item 3.
The alarm occurs sometimes during Investigate item 4, and take measures.
operation. (With no regularity)
3 Is the RST wiring correct? Is the The wiring or sequence is abnormal. Correct the state explained on the left.
contactor's wiring sequence correct? There is no problem. Investigate item 4, and take measures.
4 Monitor the power waveform with an An instantaneous power failure or voltage Review the power facility.
oscilloscope. drop occurs frequently.
There is no problem. Replace the unit.
(15) Alarm No. 73 Over-regeneration

Operation unit
[Meaning] The regenerative resistor's load exceeded the
tolerable value. B-CV C1-CV

1 Investigate the state of alarm The alarm occurs when the motor is not Check for power fluctuation, the ground
occurrence. rotating after power ON. connection and for the effect of noise. If
there is no abnormality, replace the unit.
The alarm does not occur when the Investigate items 2 and following. If
acceleration/deceleration frequency is there is no problem, reduce the
reduced. acceleration/deceleration frequency.
Other than the above. MDS-A-CR: Investigate item 2 and take
measures.
MDS-B-CV: Investigate item 3 and take
measures.
2 Check that external regenerative The type is incorrect. (Refer to the alarm Correctly set and then check again.
CR resistor type is set correctly with the "6D" parameter setting.)
only parameter (PTYP) for the drive unit The setting is correct. Investigate item 3, and take measures.
connected to the power supply unit.
Check that the rotary switch is set to
"0".
* The switch may be set to "2" for
special specifications.
3 Confirm that the alarm "75" investigate
items 3 and following and the
regenerative resistance value, etc., are
correct.
V-9
1. Troubleshooting
(17) Alarm No. 75 Overvoltage

Operation unit
[Meaning] The voltage across PN exceeded 410V.
B-CV C1-CV
[Detection] Always after power ON.

1 Check the state of alarm occurrence. The alarm occurs each time the motor Investigate item 4, and take measures.
decelerates.
The alarm occurs each time in a specific Investigate item 3, and take measures.
deceleration mode.
2 If possible, monitor the 7-segment E0 is output just before the overvoltage. Investigate item 3, and take measures.
display. (Over-regeneration warning)
Others. Investigate item 3, and take measures.
3 Monitor the operation of each axis The regeneration load increases when Reduce the frequency of simultaneous
when the alarm occurs. (When multiple several axes are decelerated deceleration.
spindle drive units are connected to simultaneously.
one converter.) Other than the above. Investigate item 4, and take measures.
4 Check whether the power is correct.
(1) Is the specified power capacity The power capacity is insufficient. Increase the power capacity.
secured?
(2) Using a tester, check that the The voltage drops below 170V. Increase the power capacity.
voltage is 170V or more even The voltage is 170V or more. Carry out item (3).
during motor
acceleration/deceleration.
(3) Monitor the power voltage with an 1. Voltage waveform distortion Eliminate the wave distortion.
oscilloscope (also during 1. Increase the power capacity, or
acceleration/deceleration). increase the power cable size.
2. Improve the other semiconductor
device in which waveform distortion
is occurring.
(Additionally install an AC reactor,
etc.)
2. When there is a local drop
3. Other waveform or frequency

abnormality
Using a tester, measure the voltage The voltage difference across each wire is Improve the power phase balance.
across the R-S, S-T and T-R wires. 10V or more.
No abnormality is found in particular. Investigate item 5, and take measures.
5 Monitor the power waveform with an An instantaneous power failure or voltage Review the power facility.
oscilloscope. drop occurs frequently.
There is no problem. Investigate item 6, and take measures.
devices in the area?.
7 If the alarm occurs when the motor is The correct value is not set. Correctly set.
decelerating from speed of 8000rpm or The correct value is set. Change the setting values as explained
more, check the spindle parameters for SP067 to SP069.
(SP067, SP068, SP069). When using Try increasing the SP270 to SP273
special motor constants, check the setting values by two to three fold.
(SP270 to SP273) setting values. Try setting the SP276 and SP277
setting values to 0.
8 If the alarm occurs the instant that the The correct value is not set. Correctly set.
motor starts accelerating or The correct value is set. Set a value between 1 and 8 in SP046.
decelerating, check the spindle (Setting 1 is the most effective.)
parameter (SP046) value.
V - 10
1. Troubleshooting
(18) Alarm No. 76 External emergency stop setting error

Operation unit
[Meaning] The rotary switch setting and parameter (PTYP)
setting do not match. B-CV C1-CV

1 Check the rotary switch setting and the When not using external emergency stop:
parameter (PTYP) of the drive unit 1. The rotary switch is set to 4 or 5. 1. Set the rotary switch to 0 or 1.
connected to the power supply unit. 2. The parameter (PTYP) is set between 2. Set the parameter (PTYP) between
**40 and **79. **00 and **39.
When using the external emergency stop:
1. The rotary switch is set to 0 or 1. 1. Set the rotary switch to 4 or 5.
2. The parameter (PTYP) is set between 2. Set the parameter (PTYP) between
**00 and **39. **40 and **79.
The setting combination is correct. Replace the unit.
(19) Alarm No. 77 Power module overheat

Operation unit
[Meaning] Overheating of the power supply's power module
(IPM) was detected. B-CV C1-CV

1 Check the heat radiating environment.
(1) Rotation of the fan on the back of The fan is not rotating correctly. Replace the fan. Take measures so
the unit that cutting oil and
(2) Contamination of heat radiating The heat radiating fins are heavily Clean the fins. dust do not get on the
fins on back of unit. contaminated with cutting oil and dust, etc. fins.
(3) Measure the unit's ambient The temperature exceeds 55C Consider means to ventilate and cool
temperature the panel.
Nothing applies. Investigate item 2, and take measures.
V - 11
1. Troubleshooting
1.3 Power supply warning

The power supply warning is displayed only on the power supply unit's 7-segment LED and is not
displayed on the spindle drive unit's 7-segment LED.
Operation can be continued after the warning, but it does indicate that there is a factor for an alarm.
(1) Alarm history display E0 Auxiliary regeneration frequency over LED display
Operation unit
[Meaning] This indicates that the instantaneous regeneration
energy is high, and regeneration with just the power B-CV C1-CV
regeneration is not sufficient. The auxiliary
regeneration has also functioned, and regeneration
at the auxiliary regeneration capacity limit is
occurring frequently. The auxiliary regeneration does
not operate when this warning occurs, so an
overvoltage alarm could occur.
[Detection] During ready ON

1 Inspect items 3 and following for alarm
75 overvoltage.
(2) Alarm history display E9 Instantaneous power failure warning LED display
[Meaning] An instantaneous power failure occurred for 25ms or

longer. An alarm did not occur because the main Operation unit
circuit voltage did not drop. This may cause an
instantaneous power failure alarm, overvoltage B-CV C1-CV
alarm or power module error.
[Detection] During ready ON

1 Inspect items 3 and following for alarm
71 instantaneous power failure.
(3) Alarm history display EA External emergency stop input LED display
[Meaning] The external emergency stop signal was input, or Operation unit
24V is not applied on the CN23 connector. B-CV C1-CV
[Detection] Always after NC power ON

1 When not using the external External emergency stop is enabled in the Invalidate the settings.
emergency stop: settings. Refer to investigation item 1 for alarm
Check the rotary switch and parameter 76.
(PTYP) settings
2 When using external emergency stop: 24V is applied on the CN23 connector. Replace the unit.
Check the CN23 connector voltage 24V is not applied on the CN23 connector. Investigate item 3.
3 (1) Check whether the CN23 The connector or cable is disconnected or Replace the cable.
connector or cable is sometimes comes loose.
disconnected.
(2) Check the external emergency The contact is faulty or is faulty sometimes. Replace the switch.
stop switch's contact
V - 12
1. Troubleshooting
(4) Alarm history display EB Over-regeneration LED display

Operation unit
[Meaning] 80% of the over-regeneration alarm level was
reached. B-CV C1-CV
[Detection] During Ready ON

1 Investigate the items for alarm 73
over-regeneration.
V - 13
VI. Maintenance
MDS-B/C1-SPT
Spindle Drive Unit Section
1. Adjustment Procedures
WARNING
1. When adjusting the drive unit with a personal computer, some parameters will be validated as
soon as they are changed. Take special care when making adjustments while rotating the
spindle, and take care not to approach body parts near the spindle. Failure to observe this
could result in personal injury.
2. When monitoring the state of the spindle or spindle motor with a personal computer, if the
spindle motors maximum speed is set to 33000r/min or more, the spindle motor speed
displayed on the personal computer will be half of the actual speed. Failure to note this could
result in spindle damage or personal injury.
CAUTION
1. Do not make extreme adjustments or changes to the parameters as the operation could
become unstable.
Note 1) SP*** (***) in the following explanations refers to the spindle parameter number and
abbreviation.
Note 2) Refer to III. Spindle Drive Unit Section, 4.4 for details on setting the parameters.
1.1 Starting up
(1) Confirm that the type of motor and spindle amplifier to be used are as ordered.
(2) Confirm that the set spindle parameters (SP001 to SP384) match the setting list.
Especially, confirm the following parameters well.
(a) SP017 (TSP) Spindle motor maximum speed
(b) SP034 (SFNC2) Spindle motor special settings
(c) SP039/040 Spindle amplifier/motor type
(d) SP257 to SP384 Spindle motor special constants
(e) CNC side spindle related parameters (Refer to the Toshiba Machine CNC "TOSNUC 888.2"
Instruction Manual.)
(3) When using the built-in motor, adjust the speed detector's waveform according to the procedures
given in the built-in motor specifications.
To start open loop operation, set the SP038 (SNFC6) bit F to "1" and turn the drive unit power ON
again. After completing the adjustments, return the setting to "0", and turn the power ON again.
1.2 Confirming the speed loop
1.2.2 Adjusting and confirming the motor (spindle) speed
The speed command is digitally input from the CNC, so there are no sections to be adjusted on the
spindle amplifier side.
Check the following items.
Couple the spindle motor with the machine, and check the machine running-in state and the control
state.
(1) Do the command speed and actual speed match?
(2) Is the rotation smooth?
(3) Is there any abnormal noise?
(4) Is there any abnormal odor?
(5) Is the bearing temperature abnormal?
Run the motor with an actual load, and confirm that there are no abnormalities.
VI - 1
1.2.3 Adjusting the deceleration time
Connect a waveform recorded between the indicator's speedometer output (CN9A - pin 9) and analog
common (CN9A - pin 1), and measure the acceleration/deceleration time.
If the deceleration time is much longer than the acceleration time, refer to section III-45 and 46, and
adjust the deceleration time.
(Applicable parameters) Following two parameters

SP087 (DIQM)
SP088 (DIQN)
Note) If the deceleration time is too small, an alarm such as AL32 (power module overcurrent) or
AL75 (overvoltage) could occur. Set the deceleration time so that it is 95% or more of the
acceleration time.
1.3 Adjusting the orientation
1.3.1 Operation
The following three types of orientation stop can be used. Select the method with SP097 (SPEC0).
1. PRE (a) Orients from the current rotation direction.

2. Forward run orientation (b) Always orients from the forward run direction.
3. Reverse run orientation (c) Always orients from the reverse run direction.
Speed
(forward
run)
Speed
(forward
run)
1.3.2 Operation sequence
1) When the orientation start command turns ON during motor rotation, the motor speed changes from
the operation speed to the position loop changeover speed. The multi-point orientation stop
position command is read in at the same time.
2) When the position loop changeover speed is reached, the control changes from speed control to
position control.
(The position loop changeover speed is automatically determined from the position loop gain (Note
1).)
3) When the control changes, the distance to the orientation stop point is calculated. The motor
decelerates to a stop following a set deceleration pattern ( SP006 (CSP) ), and then enters the
orientation stop state.
4) When the in-position range ( SP004 (OINP) ) is entered, the orientation complete signal turns ON.
5) The stop position zero point movement is carried out with SP007 (OPST).
6) When the orientation start command is canceled, the motor returns to the rotation direction and
speed command issued at that point.
VI - 2
Motor speed
Orientation start command
12-bit multi-point orientation

command
Gear selection command
(Note 1) Position loop gain parameters

Motor built-in encoder orientation, magnetic sensor orientation: SP001 (PGM)
Encoder orientation (1024p/rev) : SP002 (PGE)
1.3.3 Encoder orientation/motor built-in encoder orientation stop position
The stop position is as follows according to the encoder installation direction.
Case 1 Case 2
Normal orientation Installation direction
Encoder
Motor Belt
Arrow A
Arrow A
View from arrow A View from arrow A

Forward run Reverse run Forward run Reverse run
(Note) Case 1 applies for the motor built-in encoder orientation.
VI - 3
1.3.4 Diagram of orientation parameter relation
Parameter names are enclosed

in a box.
Position control block Speed control block
From NC
Delay/advance
Power
Or
amplifier
Position feedback
Speed feedback Spindle
motor
Encoder
Bit 5 or Spindle
Bits 0 to 2
Bit 6
Magnetic sensor
1.3.5 Preparation for motor built-in encoder orientation adjustment
[Related parameters]
Default
Parameter No. Abbrev. Name
value
SP001 PGM Position loop gain for magnetic sensor, motor-built-in encoder orientation 100
SP004 OINP Orientation in-position width 16
SP005 OSP Orientation changeover speed limit value 0
SP006 CSP Deceleration rate at orientation 20
SP007 OPST Orientation position shift amount 0
SP025 GRA1 Number of spindle side gear teeth 1 1
SP029 GRB1 Number of motor side gear teeth 1 1
SP097 SPECO Orientation specifications 0000
SP098 VGOP Speed loop gain proportional item for orientation 63
SP099 VGOI Speed loop gain integral item for orientation 60
SP100 VGOD Speed loop gain delay/advance item for orientation 15
SP105 IQGO Current loop gain magnification for orientation 1 100
SP106 IDGO Current loop gain magnification for orientation 2 100
SP107 CSP2 Orientation deceleration rate 2 0
SP119 MPGH Orientation position loop gain H coil compensation magnification 0
SP120 MPGL Orientation position loop gain L coil compensation magnification 0
SP121 MPCSH Deceleration rate H coil magnification for orientation 0
SP122 MPCSL Deceleration rate L coil magnification for orientation 0
[Preparation]
1) Confirm that the parameters are set as shown above.
VI - 4
1.3.6 Preparation for encoder orientation adjustment
Default
Parameter No. Abbrev. Name
value
SP002 PGE Position loop gain for encoder orientation 100
SP025 GRA1 Number of spindle side gear teeth 1 1 to 32767
SP029 GRB1 Number of motor side gear teeth 1 1 to 32767
SP096 EGRA Encoder gear ratio 0
Encoder
[Preparation]
1) The accurate gear ratio (or pulley ratio) from Spindle
the motor shaft to the encoder rotation shaft is
required. Confirm that the correct number of
gear teeth is set in SP025 (GRA1) to
SP032 (GRB1).
SP025 (GRA1) to SP028 (GRA4) = ACE
SP029 (GRB1) to SP032 (GRB4) = BDF
(A to F are the number of
Note) SP025 (GRA1) to SP032 (GRB4) may be gear teeth)
set by the customer, so confirm that the
accurate values corresponding to the
machine are set. Motor
2) Confirm that the parameters are set as shown

above.
VI - 5
1.3.7 Preparation for magnetic sensor orientation adjustment
Parameter No. Abbrev. Name Default value
Position loop gain during orientation for magnetic sensor,
SP001 PGM 100
motor-built-in encoder
Standard magnet = 542
SP123 MGD0 Magnetic sensor output peak value Compact magnet = 500
SP124 MGD1 Magnetic sensor linear zone width Compact magnet = 440
SP125 MGD2 Magnetic sensor changeover point Compact magnet = 220
Spindle
[Preparation]
1) The accurate gear ratio (or pulley ratio) from
the motor shaft to the magnetic sensor
rotation shaft is required. Confirm that the
correct number of gear teeth is set in
SP025 (GRA1) to SP032 (GRB1).
(A to F are the number of
SP025 (GRA1) to SP028 (GRA4) = ACE gear teeth)
SP029 (GRB1) to SP032 (GRB4) = BDF
Note) SP025 (GRA1) to SP032 (GRB4) may be Motor
set by the customer, so confirm that the
accurate values corresponding to the
machine are set.
2) Confirm that the parameters are set as shown

above.
VI - 6
1.3.8 Adjusting the orientation
[Adjustment] (Parameters that differ only during encoder orientation are indicated in parentheses {}.)
(1) Adjusting the orientation position shift
There is no potentiometer or rotary switch for the position shift.
Set the position shift with SP007 (OPST).
Change and adjust the SP007 (OPST) setting so that the target stop point is attained.
(2) Orientation
Normal rotation speed
Orientation changeover speed
Adjust with the following procedures according to the orientation state.
Adjustment procedure
Phenomenon
SP001 (PGM) SP006 (CSP)
{ SP002 (PGE) }
Note 1) : Increase the setting
Motor overtravels value
when stopping : Do not change the
setting value
Orientation time is
: Decrease the setting
long
value
Motor hunts when Note 2) The excessive error alarm
stopping will also occur when the
Excessive error alarm detector direction
occurs SP097 (SPEC0) is
incorrectly set.
Adjust SP001 (PGM) { SP002 (PGE) } first, and then adjust SP006 (CSP).
When adjusting the shortest orientation time for each gear stage, adjust SP107 (CSP2), SP108 (CSP3)
and SP109 (CSP4) in the same manner.
When using a coil changeover motor and adjusting the shortest orientation time for each coil, adjust
SP119 (MPGH), SP120 (MPGL), SP121 (MPCSH) and SP122 (MPCSL) in the same manner.
If the gear ratio is large (for example, 1:10), and the excessive error alarm occurs and the state cannot
be fixed with the above adjustments, adjust SP005 (OPSP).
If the spindle slowly rotates in the forward/reverse run directions during magnetic sensor orientation and
does not stop, change the setting for the detector installation bit with SP097 (SPEC0).
1.3.9 Adjusting the servo rigidity
Use the following adjustments to improve the servo rigidity during orientation stop.
1) Raise the position loop gain to the degree that the motor does not overtravel during orientation stop.
Motor built-in encoder orientation, magnetic sensor orientation: Increase the SP001 (PGM) value.
Encoder orientation : Increase the SP002 (PGE) value.
2) Raise the SP098 (VGOP) and SP099 (VGO1) values at the same rate to the degree that vibration
does not occur during orientation stop.
For example, if SP098 (VGOP) is set to 80, set SP099 (VGO1) to 80.
3) The impact response at stopping can be improved by increasing the SP100 (VGOD) value.
However, when this value is increased, the torque in respect to the position deviation will drop,
resulting in an adverse effect such as variation of the orientation stop position. PI control is applied
when this value is set to "0".
VI - 7
1.3.10 Delay/advance control and PI control
Select delay/advance control for normal orientation. (SP100 (VGOD) 0)

Select PI control in the following cases. (SP100 (VGOD) = 0)
When the spindle's static friction torque is large, and a stopping position accuracy is required
During PI control, the servo rigidity will drop slightly compared to delay/advance control. Thus, make a
selection that matches the machine specifications.
1.3.11 Troubleshooting for orientation trouble
(1) Orientation does not take place. (The motor keeps running.)
Cause Investigation item Remedy Remarks
The orientation detector and
parameter do not match.
Parameter
SP037 (SFNC5) Correctly set
setting value is
Motor built-in encoder orientation 4 SP037 (SFNC5).
inappropriate
Encoder orientation 1
Magnetic sensor orientation 2
Orientation is attempted with the
The Change to a motor having For motor built-in
motor built-in encoder using a
specifications do a motor built-in encoder encoder
standard motor instead of a motor
not match with Z-phase. orientation
with Z-phase.
The connector pin numbers are
incorrect, or
Correctly wire.
Wiring mistake the inserted connector number is
Replace the wire.
incorrect, or
the cable is broken.
(2) The motor overtravels and stops.

Parameter The gear ratio parameters Correctly set
setting value is SP025 (GRA1) to SP032 (GRB4) SP025 (GRA1) to
inappropriate are not correct. SP032 (GRB4).
The state is improved when the Readjust SP006 (CSP). This also applies
deceleration rate parameter for to:
orientation SP006 (CSP) is halved. SP107 (CSP2)
SP108 (CSP3)
SP109 (CSP4)
SP121 (MPCSH)
SP122 (MPGL)
The state is improved when the Readjust SP001 (PGM) This also applies
position loop gain parameters and SP002 (PGE) to:
SP001 (PGM) and SP002 (PGE) are SP119 (MPGH)
halved. SP122 (MPGL)
The orientation stop direction is Set bit 0 and 1 of
uni-directional (CCW or CW). SP097 (SPEC0) to "0".
VI - 8
(3) The stopping position deviates.

Mechanical The stop position is not deviated on There is backlash or slip, For encoder
cause the encoder shaft. etc., between the spindle and orientation
encoder.
The gear ratio between the
spindle and encoder is not
1:1 or 1:2.
There is backlash or slip, For motor
etc., between the spindle and built-in encoder
motor. orientation
The gear ratio between the
spindle and motor is not 1:1.
Noise The position detector cable is relayed Do not relay the cable.
with a terminal block (connector), etc.
The position detector cable shield is Properly treat the shield.
not properly treated.
Too much signal wire is peeled and Keep the peeled and
exposed at the connector section of exposed section to 3cm or
the position detector cable. (The less when possible. Separate
section with no shield is long.) the peeled and exposed
section from the drive wire.
(4) The stopping position does not change even when the position shift parameter is changed.
Parameter The position shift was changed from If the gear ratio between the
setting value is 2048 when the gear ratio between spindle and encoder is 1:2,
inappropriate the spindle and encoder is 1:2 (one the position shift amount for
encoder rotation with two spindle one spindle rotation is 2048
rotations). and not 4096.
(5) Vibration occurs when stopping.

Parameter The gear ratio parameters Correctly set
setting value is SP025 (GRA1) to SP032 (GRB4) SP025 (GRA1) to
inappropriate are not correct. SP032 (GRB4).
Orientation is not The vibration frequency is several Decrease the position loop
properly hertz. gain parameters
adjusted SP001 (PGM) and
SP002 (PGE).
Increase the current loop
gain parameters for
orientation SP105 (IQG0)
and
SP106 (IDG0).
The vibration frequency is 10Hz or Decrease the speed loop
more. gain parameters for
orientation SP098 (VG0P)
and SP099 (VG010).
Decrease the current loop
gain parameters for
orientation SP015 (IQG0)
and SP106 (IDG0).
VI - 9
(6) The orientation complete signal is not output.

Refer to section (1) Orientation does not take place.
The machine Decrease the in-position parameter Review the in-position range,
load is heavy PS004 (OINP). and increase SP004 (OINP).
The state is improved when the Review the speed loop gain
control for orientation stop is parameters for orientation
changed from delay/advance to PI SP098 (VG0P),
control. SP099 (VG0I) and
SP100 (VG0D).
1.4 Adjusting the synchronous tap

Refer to the "CNC Specifications Manual" for details on the adjustment procedures.
VI - 10
2. Troubleshooting
2. Troubleshooting
WARNING
1. Wait at least ten minutes after turning the 200V power supply OFF and confirm that the
CHARGE lamp on the power supply unit (resistance regeneration converter unit) has turned
OFF before starting maintenance or inspections.
2. Only qualified technician must carry out the maintenance and inspections. Work carried out
by other personnel could result in electric shocks. Contact your nearest Service Center or
Service Station for repairs and part replacement.
2.1 Introduction
If any trouble occurs in the control unit, check the following items first. Then, carry out the inspections
and repairs explained in this section.
The following information is extremely useful when contacting the machine tool builder's Service
Department.
Items to confirm at trouble occurrence
Never perform a megger test (insulation resistance measurement)

Notice on the spindle amplifier.
1. Check the 7-segment display on the drive unit or the monitor screen on the personal computer to
confirm which alarm is displayed on the drive unit. Also check the past alarms.
(Refer to VI-15 List of alarms and warnings.)
2. Can the fault or abnormality be repeated?
3. Is the ambient temperature and inner-panel temperature correct?
4. Was the motor accelerating, decelerating or in constant speed operation? What was the speed?
5. Does the state differ during forward run and reverse run?
6. Did an instantaneous power failure occur?
7. Did the problem occur at a specific operation or command?
8. At what frequency does the problem occur?
9. Does the problem occur when the load is applied or removed?
10. Were any remedial measures, etc., taken?
11. How many years has the equipment been in use?
12. Is the power voltage correct? Does it fluctuate greatly depending on the time?
2.2 Step 1
Check the following items as step 1 of troubleshooting.
(1) Power voltage ... 200V (+10% -15%) 50Hz, 200 to 230V (+10% -15%) 60Hz. The power voltage
does not drop below 200 -15% for even a short time.
(Example) The voltage drops at a set time each day.
The voltage drops when a specific machine is started.
(2) Are the control functions around the unit normal?
(Example) Are the NC and sequence circuit, etc., normal?
Visually check for any problems with the wiring, etc.
(3) Is the control unit's ambient temperature (inner-panel temperature) 55C or less?
(4) Are there any abnormalities in the unit's appearance?
(Example) Loosening of the connected connectors, damage, entry of foreign matter, etc.
VI - 11
2. Troubleshooting
The general problem can be approximately pinpointed by carefully confirming the above state. The
MDS-A-CV and SP problems are largely classified into the following types.
The controller power was turned ON for the first time, but normal operation
was not possible. (I)
Fault class A The system operates normally, but suddenly malfunctions. (II)
Normal operation does not take place sometimes.
The orientation stop position deviates. An alarm is displayed. (III)
Unit fault Power supply unit fault

Resistance regeneration converter unit fault
Spindle drive unit fault
Detector fault Motor speed detection encoder fault
1024p/rev encoder fault
Magnetic sensor fault
Fault in parameters or data transmitted from personal computer
Power supply fault
Motor fault
Other fault (Incorrect conditions for input signals, broken cable, etc.)
2.3 Step 2
Fault class I Investigation item Remedy

The controller The controller is strictly tested before
power was shipment. Normal operation when
turned ON for the power is turned ON for the first
the first time, time may not be possible due to:
but normal (1) The unit was bumped against (1) Visually check the unit appearance for
operation was something and damaged during abnormal points.
not possible. operation or installation.
(2) Incorrect or broken external (2) Check that the unit's 7-segment LED is ON.
wiring or sequence. Check that the external wiring and
Is the ground wire correctly sequence are complete. (Note 1)
wired? Note that the power Check the input/output signals to the unit
phase order is irrelevant. with the personal computer's monitor
screen or with an oscilloscope.
(3) Are the parameter settings (3) Check the spindle parameters.
correct?
(4) The motor speed does not (4) Check that the motor's UVW wires are
increase. correctly connected.
When using the built-in motor, check that
the speed detector's output waveform is
correct.
VI - 12
2. Troubleshooting
Fault class I Investigation item Remedy

(5) Operation is normal when motor (5) Check that the load state is as designed.
is run as an isolated unit.
(6) Orientation stop is incorrect (6) Adjust the orientation.
(overtravels, etc.)
(7) An alarm is displayed on the (7) Check section "2.5 Approach per
unit's 7-segment. phenomenon".
(Note 1) Turn the start signal SRN and SRI input ON at least one second after the READY signal is
input.
Fault class II Investigation item Remedy

The system (1) Check the input power voltage. (1) If the power voltage is abnormal, return it to
operates 200VAC +10% -15% 50Hz the correct level.
normally, but 200 to 230VAC +10% -15% Secure a power capacity that can maintain
suddenly 60Hz the voltages given on the left even during a
malfunctions. transient state (during
acceleration/deceleration, during cutting).
(2) An alarm is displayed on the (2) Check section "2.5 Approach per
unit's 7-segment. phenomenon".
(3) Are the signals input from the (3) Check with the personal computer's Monitor
NC (PC) correct? screen, or check the DIO and S-analog
voltage with an oscilloscope.
(4) Is each detector's output (4) Check the waveform with an oscilloscope.
waveform correct? Then, readjust or replace.
Built-in speed detector
1024P/rev encoder
Magnetic sensor
Fault class III Investigation item Remedy

Normal When this occurs, it is necessary to
operation does completely understand the state of
not take place occurrence.
sometimes. (Load state, operation mode, etc.)
The orientation The following three causes can be
stop position considered:
deviates. (1) The input power instantly fails or (1) Investigate in detail for fluctuation of the
An alarm is instantly drops, and an input power, etc.
displayed, but instantaneous power failure
normal error is displayed.
operation is
restored when
the power is
turned ON
again or reset.
VI - 13
2. Troubleshooting
Fault class III Investigation item Remedy

(2) The control circuit (2) Find the source of the noise and install a
malfunctioned due to surge killer, etc.
abnormally large noise, etc. Review the connection of the unit's
The unit can withstand power grounding, and detector's shield and
line noise up to 1600V/1us. grounding, etc.
(3) Orientation is incorrect. (3) Adjust the orientation parameters again.
The orientation stop position (Change the SP001, 002 and 006 setting
deviates. values.)
The orientation time is long. When using the 1024P/rev encoder,
investigate the backlash between the
spindle and encoder.
VI - 14
2. Troubleshooting
2.4 List of alarms and warnings

Alarm Abbrev. Name Details Oper- Resetting
No. ation method
12 ME Memory error A check sum or RAM check error occurred in the spindle drive unit's control a AR
card ROM.
13 SWE Software processing The software data process did not end within the set time. a PR
error
17 ADE AD error The current detection AD converter did not function correctly during a PR
initialization.
20 NS1 No signal The motor PLG's Z phase signal was not input, or the signal was not at the a PR
(motor PLG - Z phase) correct level.
21 NS No signal The signal was not input from the spindle encoder, or was not at the correct a PR
(spindle encoder) level.
23 OSE Excessive speed The speed command and motor speed deflection exceeded the specified a PR
deflection value (50r/min: fixed value), and the state continued for a specified time.
31 OS Overspeed The motor's actual speed exceeded 115% of the set maximum speed. a PR
32 PMOC Power module A current exceeding the set value flowed into the IPM used in the spindle a PR
overcurrent drive's main circuit.
37 PE Parameter error A parameter exceeding the tolerable range was set. a PR
3B PMOH Power module overheat The IPM used in the spindle drive unit's main circuit overheated. a PR
3F OSE2 Excessive speed The speed command and motor speed deflection exceeded the specified a PR
deflection 2 value (SP194 setting value: %), and the state continued for a specified
time.
40 KE1 TK unit change error The changeover signal procedure was mistaken when using the TK unit. a PR
41 KE2 TK unit communication The communication with the TK unit was not correct when using the TK a PR
error unit.
42 PLE PLG feedback error When PLG automatic adjustment was carried out, the A and B phase a PR
signal offset was greatly deviated.
46 OHM Motor overheat Overload, or the motor cooling blower stopped and the motor overheated a PR
causing the built-in thermal protector to function.
50 OL Overload The motor exceeded the overload detection level for a time longer than the a PR
detection time constant.
51 OL2 Overload 2 A load exceeding the continuous rating was applied on the motor for longer a PR
than the specified time.
52 OD Excessive error The position tracking error exceeded the specified value during orientation. a PR
5C ORFE Orientation feedback The feedback counter value exceeded the specified value when orientation a PR
error was completed.
61 to Power supply alarm An alarm occurred in the power supply unit. a Note 2
6E
6F PSE Power supply not (1) The power supply unit is not connected. a AR
connected (2) An alarm occurred in the power supply unit. Note 2
70 to Power supply alarm An alarm occurred in the power supply unit. a Note 2
77
88 WD Watch dog The spindle drive unit's software process did not end within the set time. a AR
8A TE1TOSNUC Data communication with TOSNUC was not completed correctly. a PR
communication error 1
8B TPE Parameter conversion A parameter conversion request was issued from TOSNUC while the a PR
error spindle drive unit was in the gate ON state.
8C TE2 TOSNUC Synchronized communication with TOSNUC was not completed correctly. a PR
communication error 2
A9 WOFE Orientation feedback The spindle drive unit is retrying orientation. b -
error warning
E1 WOL Overload warning The motor current exceeded the overload detection level for a time 80% or b -
more of the detection time constant.
E4 WPE Parameter error When setting the parameters after turning the spindle drive unit power ON, b -
warning a value exceeding the tolerable range was set.
E7 NCE Emergency stop The emergency stop warning was input from TOSNUC. c -
warning
Note 1) If the above protective functions activate, the alarm No. will appear on the spindle drive unit's 7-segment LED, and the
following operation will take place. The resetting methods are listed below.
[Operation] a : The base interception is carried out for the spindle drive unit, the external contactor turns OFF,
and the motor coasts to a stop.
b : Only a warning is displayed. Operation continues.
c : The motor decelerates to a stop with regenerative braking. Then, the base interception is
carried out, and the external contactor turns OFF momentarily.
[Resetting methods] AR : Turn the spindle drive unit and power supply power OFF once.
PR : Input the reset signal from TOSNUC.
- : Operation is automatically resumed after the warning is reset. Note that if the emergency
stop warning occurs, the start signal must be turned OFF once. (Except during orientation.)
Note 2) If an alarm occurs in the power supply unit, a value between 61 and 77 will appear on the LED. Refer to (2) Power supply unit
on the next page for details on the alarm and the resetting methods.
Note 3) If parameter SP038 (SFNC6)-bit 0 is set to "1", operation "c" will take place for alarm Nos. 21, 46 and 52. Note that in this
case, the external contactor will turn OFF immediately after the motor stops regardless of the parameter SP192 (FNC0)
setting.
VI - 15
2. Troubleshooting
2.5 Approach per phenomenon
2.5.1 Details when alarm or warning is displayed on the 7-segment display
(1) Alarm No. 12 : Memory error 1

[Meaning]
A check sum or RAM check error occurred in the spindle drive units internal ROM.
Investigation item Investigation results Remedy
1 Investigate the repeatability. Occurs each time the power is turned Replace the spindle drive unit.
ON.
Occurs periodically. Investigate item 2, and remedy.
2 Investigate the wiring and installation 1) The grounding is incomplete. Correctly ground.
environment. 2) The alarm occurs easily when certain Take noise prevention measures for the
1) Is the unit correctly grounded? device operates. left device.
2) Is there any equipment generating
noise near the unit? No special problem Replace the spindle drive unit.
(2) Alarm No. 13 : Software processing error

[Meaning]
The spindle drive units software data process did not end within the set time.
ON.
(3) Alarm No. 17 : AD error

[Meaning]
The current detection A/D converter circuit in the spindle drive unit did not function correctly
during initialization.
ON.
(4) Alarm No. 20 : No signal (motor PLG - Z phase)

[Meaning]
Error in the Z phase signal of the motor speed detection PLG.
1 Check the spindle parameter (SP037: Occurs each time the power is turned Replace the spindle drive unit.
SFNC5) setting value. ON.
2 Check the speed detector waveform. The waveform is not correct. Adjust so that it is correct. (Refer to
section VI-36.)
Or, replace the detector.
The waveform is correct. Investigate item 3, and remedy.
3 Turn the power OFF, and check the The connection is faulty or broken. Replace the detector cable.
detector cable connection with a tester. Correctly connect.
The connection is correct. Replace the spindle drive unit or
detector.
VI - 16
2. Troubleshooting
(5) Alarm No. 21 : No signal detection

[Meaning]
Error in the 1024P/rev encoder for orientation or 90,000 pulse encoder for C axis A, B, Z phase
signals.
1 Check the spindle parameter (SP037: Bit 0 is set to "1" even though encoder Correctly set.
SFNC5) setting value. orientation is not used.
No special problem Investigate item 2, and remedy.
2 Tug the connector to check if the Is disconnected (loose). Correctly install.
detector connector (spindle drive unit Is not disconnected (loose). Investigate item 3, and remedy.
side and detector side) is disconnected.
3 Turn the power OFF and check the The connection is faulty or broken. Replace the detector cable.
detector cable connection with a tester. Correctly connect.
The connection is correct. Replace the spindle drive unit or
detector.
(6) Alarm No. 23 : Excessive speed deflection

[Meaning]
The speed command and current motor speed difference exceeded 50rpm for 12 seconds or
more.
1 Check the UVW wiring between the The wiring is not correct. Correctly wire.
spindle drive unit and motor. The wiring is correct. Investigate item 2, and remedy.
2 Check the spindle parameter (SP034, The values are not correct. Correctly set.
SP040, SP055, SP257 and following) The correct values are set. Investigate item 3, and remedy.
setting value.
3 Measure the acceleration/deceleration Takes more 12 sec. or more. Increase the spindle parameter (SP055)
time to the spindle maximum speed. setting value.
If the alarm occurs when changing from Takes 12 sec. or less. Investigate item 4, and remedy.
forward run (reverse run) to reverse run
(forward run), measure the time from
the forward run (reverse run) maximum
speed to the reverse run (forward run)
maximum speed.
4 If the alarm occurs during cutting, check The load amount is 120% or higher. Decrease the load.
the load amount. The load amount is 119% or lower. Investigate item 5, and remedy.
5 Tug the connector to check if the speed Is disconnected (loose). Correctly install.
speed detector cable connection with a Correctly connect.
tester. The connection is correct. Investigate item 7, and remedy.
7 Check the speed detector waveform. The waveform is not correct. Adjust so that it is correct.
(Refer to section VI-36.)
The waveform is correct. Replace the spindle drive unit.
VI - 17
2. Troubleshooting
(7) Alarm No. 31 : Overspeed

[Meaning]
The motor speed exceeded 115% of the value set in spindle parameter (SP017:TSP).
1 Investigate the repeatability. Occurs only during speed loop operation. Investigate item 2, and remedy.
Occurs constantly. Investigate item 3, and remedy.
2 Check the spindle parameter (SP017: The setting value is "2000" or less. Increase the setting value.
TSP) setting value. The setting value is "2001" or more. Investigate item 3, and remedy.
noise near the unit? 3) The cables are correctly shielded. Correctly shield the cables.
3) Are the speed and position detector No special problem Investigate item 4, and remedy.
cables correctly shielded?
section VI-36.)
VI - 18
2. Troubleshooting
(8) Alarm No. 32 : Power module error

[Meaning]
One of the following errors occurred in the IPM used by the spindle drive unit.
1) The overcurrent protection functioned.
2) The IPM internal temperature rose above a set value.
3) The base power voltage dropped.
1 Check when the phenomenon occurred. Occurs before ready ON. Replace the spindle drive unit.
Occurs after servo ON. Investigate item 2, and remedy.
setting value.
3 If the alarm occurs during cutting, check The load amount is 120% or higher. Decrease the load.
the load amount. The load amount is 119% or lower. Investigate item 4, and remedy.
4 If the alarm occurs when the motor is The values are not correct. Correctly set.
decelerating from speed of 8000rpm or The correct values are set. Change the setting values as explained
more, check the spindle parameters for SP067 to SP069.
(SP067, SP068, SP069). When using Try increasing the SP270 to SP273
special motor constants, check the setting values by two to three fold.
(SP270 to SP273, SP276, SP277) Try setting the SP276 and SP277 setting
setting values. values to 0.
Investigate item 5, and remedy.
5 If the alarm occurs the instant that the The values are not correct. Correctly set.
motor starts accelerating or The correct values are set. Try setting a value between 1 and 8 in
decelerating, check the spindle SP046. (Setting 1 is the most effective.)
parameter (SP046) value.
Investigate item 6, and remedy.
6 Check the U, V and W wiring between 1) The screws are loose. Tighten.
the spindle drive unit and motor. 2) There is a short circuit. Replace the cable.
1) Are any terminal screws loose?
2) Is the wire short-circuited between 3) There is a ground fault. Replace the cable.
the phases? No special problem Investigate item 7, and remedy.
3) Is there a ground fault at any phase?
Open both ends of the cable when
checking items 2) and 3).
7 Check the motor insulation. The resistance value is 1M or less. Replace the motor.
Perform a megger test between each
The resistance value is more than 1M. Investigate item 8, and remedy.
motor wire and ground.
8 Check the spindle drive unit's cooling The cooling fan is stopped. Replace the spindle drive unit.
fan. The cooling fan is rotating correctly. Investigate item 9, and remedy.
9 Check the power voltage. The power voltage drops below 170V Review the power capacity.
during acceleration/deceleration and
cutting.
The power voltage is always 171V or Investigate item 10, and remedy.
more.
VI - 19
2. Troubleshooting
(9) Alarm No. 37 : Parameter error

[Meaning]
An illegal spindle parameter was found during initialization.
1 Check the spindle parameter setting An incorrect value is set. Correctly set.
values. No special problem Investigate item 2, and remedy.
The incorrectly set parameter number is
displayed with the spindle drive unit's
LED or personal computer's monitor
screen.
(10) Alarm No. 3B : Power module overheat

[Meaning]
Overheating of the IPM used in the spindle drive units main circuit was detected.
1 Check the heat radiation environment.
Check the rotation of the fan on the back The fan is not rotating correctly. Replace the fan. Take measures so
of the unit. that cutting oil and
Check for contamination of heat The heat radiating fins are heavily Clean the fins. dust do not get on
radiating fins on back of unit. contaminated with cutting oil and dust, the fins.
etc.
Measure the unit's ambient temperature The temperature exceeds 55C. Consider means to ventilate and cool the
panel.
Nothing applies. Investigate item 2, and remedy.
(11) Alarm No. 3F : Excessive speed deflection 2

[Meaning]
The speed command and motor speed deflection exceeded the tolerable value set in the
parameter (SP194), and the state continued for a specified time (SP195).
1 Check the spindle parameter setting An incorrect value is set, or the setting Correctly set.
values. value is too small.
No special problem Investigate items 3 and following for
alarm No. 23 (excessive speed
deflection).
VI - 20
2. Troubleshooting
(12) Alarm No. 40 : TK unit change error

[Meaning]
The changeover signal procedure was mistaken when using the TK unit.
1 Refer to the separate 1-amplifier
2-motor specifications
(BNP-A-2993-22).
(13) Alarm No. 41 : TK unit communication error

[Meaning]
The communication between the TK unit and spindle drive unit was not correct when using the
TK unit.
1 Refer to the separate 1-amplifier
2-motor specifications
(BNP-A-2993-22).
(14) Alarm No. 46 : Motor overheat

[Meaning]
The motor overheated and the thermal protector built-in the motor overheated.
When this alarm occurs, it cannot be reset until the motor has stopped and the motor cooling fan has run for 10 or more
minutes.

1 Investigate the repeatability. Occurs immediately after turning power Investigate item 2, and remedy.
ON.
Occurs several minutes after operation
starts.
Occurs after operating for a while. Investigate item 5, and remedy.
2 Tug the speed detector cable connector Is disconnected (loose). Correctly install.
on the spindle drive unit to see if it is No special problem Investigate item 3, and remedy.
disconnected.
3 Check the speed detector cable A connection defect is found. Correctly connect.
connection. The connection is correct. Investigate item 4, and remedy.
4 Check between OHS1 and OHS2 on the The resistance value is several 100 or Replace the motor.
motor thermal protector with a tester. higher.
The resistance value is 10 or lower. Replace the spindle drive unit.
5 Check the spindle load amount. The unit is started and stopped Decrease the starting/stopping
frequently, or the cutting load is large. frequency or lower the load.
6 Check the motor cooling fan wiring and The motor cooling fan wiring is incorrect. Correctly wire.
rotation. The wiring is correct but the fan does not Replace the motor.
rotate.
7 Check the finger guard on the motor The finger guard is clogged. Clean.
cooling fan section. No special problem Replace the spindle drive unit.
VI - 21
2. Troubleshooting
(15) Alarm No. 50 : Overload

Alarm No. 51 : Overload
[Meaning]
Alarm No. 50
The current flowing to the spindle motor exceeded the overload detection level (spindle
parameter SP064: OLL) and continued longer than the overload detection time (spindle
parameter SP063: OLT).
Alarm No. 51
A load exceeding the spindle motor's continuous rating was applied for longer than the
specified time.
setting value.
2 Check the spindle parameter (SP063 The standard value is not set. Set the standard value.
and SP064) setting value. The standard value is set. Investigate item 3, and remedy.
3 Check the U, V and W wiring between 1) The screws are loose. Tighten.
the spindle drive unit and motor. 2) There is a short circuit. Replace the cable.
1) Are any terminal screws loose?
2) Is the wire short-circuited between 3) There is a ground fault. Replace the cable.
the phases? No special problem Investigate item 4, and remedy.
3) Is there a ground fault at any phase?
Open both ends of the cable when
checking items 2) and 3).
speed detector cable connection with a Correctly connect.
section VI-36.)
7 Check the motor load amount. The load amount exceeds the motor Decrease the load to within the motor
rating. rating.
8 Check the motor rotation. The motor is locked. Review the machine side.
No special problem Replace the spindle drive unit.
VI - 22
2. Troubleshooting
(16) Alarm No. 52 : Excessive error

[Meaning]
The position tracking error exceeded the specified value (excessive error width setting value)
during orientation.
excessive error width setting value
(SP102: OODR): Standard value 32767 (32767 pulses)
1 Investigate the repeatability. Occurs during orientation. Investigate item 2, and remedy.
2 If the alarm occurs during encoder OK if the bit 5 setting value is changed. Change the bit 5 setting value.
orientation, check the spindle parameter NG even if the bit 5 setting value is Return the bit 5 setting value to the
(SP097: SPEC0) bit 5 setting value. changed. original value, investigate item 3, and
remedy.
3 Check the spindle parameter (SP001: OK if PGM and PGE are doubled or if Change the setting values.
PGM, SP002: PGE, SP006: CSP) CSP is decreased to half.
setting value. NG even with the above settings. Investigate item 4, and remedy.
4 Tug the connector to check if the Is disconnected (loose). Correctly install.
position/speed detector connectors Is not disconnected (loose). Investigate item 5, and remedy.
(spindle drive unit side and
position/speed detector sides) are
disconnected.
position/speed detector cable Correctly connect.
connections with a tester. The connection is correct. Investigate item 6, and remedy.
section VI-36.)
The waveform is correct. Replace the spindle drive unit or position
detector.
(17) Alarm No. 5C : Orientation feedback error

[Meaning]
The command and feedback difference exceeded the setting value (SP114: OPER) when
orientation in-position was completed.
1 Is the speed detector cable correctly The cable is not correctly shielded. Correctly shield the cable.
shielded? The cable is correctly shielded. Investigate item 2, and remedy.
2 Is the encoder cable relayed? The cable is relayed. Use one encoder cable.
The cable is not relayed. Investigate item 3, and remedy.
3 Extend and contract the encoder or The cable is broken. Replace the cable.
speed detector cable, and check The cable is not broken. Investigate item 4, and remedy.
whether it is broken with a tester.
4 Check whether the speed detector's A, The waveform is deviated. Correctly adjust. Refer to adjustment
B and Z phase waveform is adjausted. procedures (BFN-14052-01)
The waveform is correct. Investigate item 4 for the spindle, and
remedy.
(18) Alarm No. 61 to 7F : Power supply alarm

[Meaning]
An error was detected in the power supply unit.
1 Refer to the troubleshooting section for
the power supply.
VI - 23
2. Troubleshooting
(19) Alarm No. 8A 8B 8C : TOSNUC communication error 1/Parameter conversion error/

TOSNUC communication error 2
[Meaning]
8A: Data communication with TOSNUC was not completed correctly.
8B: A parameter conversion request was issued from TOSNUC while the spindle drive unit
was in the gate ON state.
8C: Synchronized communication with TOSNUC was not completed correctly, or an illegal
spindle parameter was found during initialization.
1 Tug the connection connectors or Is disconnected (loose). Correctly install.
terminating connectors between the NC Excessive force is applied.
and spindle drive units to check if they No special problem Investigate item 2, and remedy.
are disconnected. Also check if an
excessive force is being applied on the
connectors.
2 Disconnect each cable in item 1, and A connection defect is found. Replace the cable
check the connection with a tester. No connection defect was found. Investigate item 3, and remedy.
noise near the unit? No special problem Check and remedy the Toshiba Machine
CNC hardware, etc.
If the problem still cannot be
remedied, replace the spindle drive unit.
(19) Warning No. E1 : Overload warning

[Meaning]
The current flowing to the spindle motor exceeded the overload detection level (spindle
parameter SP064: OLL) and the time exceeded 80% of the overload detection time (spindle
parameter SP063: OLT).
1 Perform the same investigation and
remedies as for alarm No. 50.
(20) Warning No. E7 : Emergency stop

[Meaning]
An emergency stop signal was input from an external source.
1 Check whether the emergency stop Switch is ON. Turn OFF the emergency stop switch.
switch is on. Switch is OFF. Investigate item 2, and remedy.
2 Tug the DIO connector to check if it is Is disconnected (loose). Correctly install.
disconnected. Is not disconnected (loose). Investigate item 3, and remedy.
position/speed detector cable Correctly connect.
connections with a tester. Investigate item 4, and remedy.
4 Confirm that the +24V power for DIO is The connection is faulty, or the power is Correctly connect.
correctly connected and supplied. not supplied. Supply the +24V power.
The connection is correct. Replace the spindle amplifier.
VI - 24
2. Troubleshooting
2.5.2 Details when alarm or warning is not displayed on 7-segment unit

(1) No abnormality is displayed, but the motor does not rotate.
1 Check the wiring around the power The wiring is incorrect. Loose screws or Correctly wire. Tighten the screws.
supply unit and spindle drive unit. broken wires are found. Replace the wires.
Also check for looseness in the terminal No special problem Investigate item 2, and remedy.
screws and for broken wires, etc.
2 Tug the connectors to check whether Is disconnected (loose). Correctly install.
they are disconnected. Is not disconnected (loose). Investigate item 3, and remedy.
3 Check that the +24V power for DIO is The power is not supplied. Supply the +24V power.
correctly supplied. The power is supplied. Investigate item 4, and remedy.
4 Check the input voltage. The voltage exceeds the specified value. Restore the power to the specified value.
The voltage is within the specified value. Investigate item 5, and remedy.
5 Check all spindle parameters. The correct values are not set. Set the correct values.
The correct values are set. Investigate item 6, and remedy.
6 Check the input signals. The signal is not input or the sequence is Correct the input signals.
Are the READY, forward run, reverse incorrect.
run signals input? The orientation command is input.
The forward and reverse run signals No special problem Investigate item 7, and remedy.
must be input at least one second after
READY ON.
The forward run and reverse run signals
may be turned ON simultaneously.
7 Check the speed command. The speed command is not correctly Correctly input the speed command.
input.
The speed command is input correctly. Replace the spindle drive unit.
(2) No fault is displayed, but the motor only rotates slowly, or a large noise is heard from the motor.
1 Check the U, V and W wiring between The wiring is not correct. Correctly wire.
the spindle drive unit and motor The wiring is correct. Investigate item 2, and remedy.
2 Check the input voltage. One of the three phases is not the Restore the power to the specified value.
specified value.
input.
The speed command is input correctly. Investigate item 4, and remedy.
side and speed detector side) is
disconnected.
speed detector cable connection with a Correctly connected.
section VI-36.)
The waveform is correct. Replace the spindle drive.
VI - 25
2. Troubleshooting
(3) The rotation speed command and actual rotation speed do not match.
1 Check the speed command. The speed command is not input Input the correct speed command.
correctly.
The speed command is correct. Investigate item 2, and remedy.
2 Check for slips between the motor and Slipping is found. Repair the machine side.
spindle. (If the belt or clutch are No special problem Investigate item 3, and remedy.
connected.)
3 Check the spindle parameters (SP034, The correct values are not set. Set the correct values.
SP040, SP017, SP257 and following). The correct values are set. Replace the spindle drive unit.
(4) The starting time is long or has increased in length.

1 Check if the friction torque has The torque has increased. Repair the machine side.
increased. No special problem Investigate item 2, and remedy.
2 Rotate the motor bearings by hand to The bearings do not rotate smoothly. Replace the spindle motor.
see that they are normal. The bearings rotate smoothly. Investigate item 3, and remedy.
3 Check if the torque limit signal is being The signal is input. Do not input the signal.
input. The signal is not input. Replace the spindle drive unit.
(5) The motor stops during cutting.

1 Check the load amount during cutting. The load meter indicates a value higher Decrease the load.
than 120% during cutting.
2 Perform the same investigation and
remedies as for item (4).
(6) The vibration and noise (gear noise), etc., are large.
1 Check the machine's dynamic balance. The same sound is heard during coast to Repair the machine side.
(Coast to a stop from the maximum stop.
speed.) No special problem Investigate item 2, and remedy.
2 Check for a resonance point on the The vibration and sound increases at a Repair the machine side.
machine. (Coast to a stop from the certain speed during coast to stop.
maximum speed.) No special problem Investigate item 3, and remedy.
3 Check the machine backlash. Backlash is large. Repair the machine side.
4 Confirm the spindle parameter (SP022: The phenomenon decreases when the Change the setting. Note that the impact
VGNP1, SP023: VGN11, SP056: setting value is lowered to half. response will decrease.
PYVR) settings. No change even with the above settings. Return the setting value to the original
value, perform investigation item 5, and
remedy.
disconnected.
8 Confirm the spindle parameter (SP067, The state is reduced when the setting is Change the setting value.
SP068 and SP069) changed as explained in SP067 to
SP069.
The state does not change even when Replace the spindle drive unit.
the above setting is made.
VI - 26
2. Troubleshooting
(7) The spindle coasts during deceleration.

1 Check for slips between the motor and Slipping is found. Repair the machine side.
spindle. (If connected with a belt or No special problem Replace the spindle drive unit.
clutch.)
(8) The rotation is not stable.

1 Confirm the spindle parameter (SP022: The rotation stabilizes when the setting Change the setting. Note that the gear
VGNP1, SP023: VGNI1) values are doubled. sound may increase.
The state does not change even when Return the setting value to the original
the above settings are made. value, investigate item 2, and remedy.
disconnected.
(Especially check the shield wiring.)
The waveform is correct. Investigate item 5, and set.
5 Investigate the wiring and installation The grounding is incomplete. Correctly ground.
environment. No special problem Investigate item 6, and set.
Is the unit correctly grounded?
6 Confirm the spindle parameter (SP067, The state is reduced when the setting is Change the setting value.
SP068 and SP069) changed as explained in SP067 to
SP069.
The state does not change even when Replace the spindle drive unit.
the above setting is made.
(9) The motor speed does not rise above a set speed.
Check whether the override input on the input.
machine operation panel is being input. The speed command is input correctly. Investigate item 2, and remedy.
2 Check whether the load has increased The load has increased. Repair the machine side.
suddenly. No special problem Investigate item 3, and remedy.
3 Rotate the motor bearings by hand to The bearings do not rotate smoothly. Replace the spindle motor.
see that they are normal. The bearings rotate smoothly. Investigate item 4, and remedy.
disconnected.
section VI-36.)
VI - 27
2. Troubleshooting
2.6 Periodic inspections
WARNING
1. Wait at least ten minutes after turning the 200V power supply OFF and confirm that the
CHARGE lamp on the power supply unit (resistance regeneration converter unit) has turned
OFF before starting maintenance or inspections.
2. Only qualified technician must carry out the maintenance and inspections. Work carried out
by other personnel could result in electric shocks. Contact your nearest Service Center or
Service Station for repairs and part replacement.
Maintenance and inspections are indispensable for attaining the device's fullest performance,
preventing accidents beforehand, and continuing highly reliable operation for a long time.
Never perform a megger test (insulation resistance measurement)

Notice on the spindle amplifier's control circuit.
2.6.1 Inspecting the control unit

Inspection Inspection
Points Remedy
item cycle
1 Cooling fan Once a month (1) Does the fan rotate smoothly when rotated by hand?
(2) Does the fan rotate powerfully when the power is turned ON? Replace the unit.
(3) Are the bearings making any abnormal noise?
2 Contamination As necessary Periodically clean the areas around the amplifier, especially the cooling
and screw fan, and tighten the input/output terminals and connections.
loosening
3 Wiring As necessary Check that the wires are not contacting the conductive parts and that
they are not caught.
2.6.2 Inspecting the motor

Inspection Inspection
Points Remedy
item cycle
1 Noise and Once a month Is there any new noise or abnormal vibration?
vibration Check the following items when there is any abnormality.
(1) Check the foundation and installation.
(2) Check the core alignment accuracy of the coupling.
(3) Is any vibration conveyed from the coupler?
(4) Are the bearings damaged or making any abnormal noise? Clean
(5) Are the reduction gears or belt vibrating or making any abnormal
noise?
(6) Is there any abnormality in the control unit?
(7) Is there any abnormality at the cooling fan section?
(8) Is the belt tension appropriate?
2 Temperature Once a month Is the bearing temperature normal?
rise (Normally, approx. ambient temperature +10 to 40C.)
Has the motor frame temperature changed from normal use?
Check the following items when there is any abnormality.
(1) Is the cooling fan rotating normally?
(2) Is there anything caught in the cooling wind path (between frame
and cover) thereby blocking the wind path?
(3) Has the load increased abnormally?
(4) Is there any abnormality in the control unit? Refer to section 2.5
3 Insulation Every Is the insulation resistance value abnormally low?
resistance 6 months Disconnect the wiring with the spindle drive unit, and perform a megger
value test between the circuit batch and ground.
(No problem if the value is 1M or more when measured with a 500V
megger tester.)
If the insulation resistance is 1M or less, the inside of the motor must
be cleaned and dried out.
To dry, disassemble the motor and heat it in a dryer at a temperature
less than 90C
4 Cooling fan Weekly, Is the fan rotating normally and feeding wind? Is there any abnormal
monthly noise or vibration?
VI - 28
3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor

3.1 Disassembling and assembling the SJ type AC spindle motor
1 Cable and PCB Terminal box cover

(1) Remove the cover of the terminal box
on the top of the fan case.
(2) Disconnect the cable connected from

the power distribution box to the
motor.
(a) Three motor main lead wires

(U, V, W)
(b) Two cooling fan lead wires
(BU, BV)
(c) Two thermal protector lead wires
(OHS1, OHS2)
(d) PCB's external connector mate
plug
Fan case
(3) Remove the external connector from Pan head screw for fixing PCB PCB
the external connector fixing clamp,
and disconnect the internal
connector from the socket.
(4) The PCB can be removed by
removing the pan head screw fixing
the PCB.
(5) Reassemble the PCB by following
steps (1) to (4) in reverse.
External contactor fixing External connector Internal connector

clamp
Lead wire protection packing
VI - 29
2 Cooling fan
132 frame and smaller
(1) Remove the hexagon socket bolt
fixing the finger guard.
(2) Remove the flat-head screw at the

center of the cooling fan. Only the fan
will come off.
(3) Cut the four cooling fan lead wires

connected in the terminal box. The
fan motor can be removed from the
fan case when the pan head screw
fixing the fan motor body is removed.
VI - 30
(4) Reassemble the cooling fan by

following steps (1) to (3) in reverse.
Fan
motor
Finger
guard
Fan
160 frame and larger

(1) Remove the three hexagon socket
bolts fixing the fan case, and pull the
fan case backward. The fan case can
be removed with the cooling fan
attached.

VI - 31
(3) Cut the three cooling fan lead wires

cooling fan can be removed from the
fixing the cooling from the inner side
of the fan case is removed.

following steps (1) to (3) in reverse.
Cooling fan
Finger guard
3 Sensor and detection gears

(1) Disconnect the sensor's inner con-
nector from the PCB in the terminal
box.
attached.
VI - 32
(3) When the two pan head screws fixing

the sensor installation seat are
removed, the installation seat will Sensor installation seat
come off with the sensor attached.
Sensor Installation seat fixing screw
Take care not to contact the sensor
against the detection gears at this
time.
(4) To adjust the sensor, loosen the

sensor fixing screw with the sensor
installation seat fixed. Set a thickness
gauge between the detection gears
and sensor, and adjust the gap to
0.150.01. Confirm that the sensor's
matching marks are aligned before
tightening the sensor fixing screws to
fix the sensor. (Refer to photo on
right.)
Thickness gauge Detection gears
Sensor fixing screw
(5) Apply screw lock on the sensor fixing

screw and installation seat fixing
screw.
(6) Pull the sensor lead wires sufficiently

into the terminal box so that they do
not get caught inside when assembl-
ing the fan case.
Align the matching marks.
(7) To remove the detection gears,

screw an eye bolt into the screw hole
(MS screw), and by using a puller,
turn the puller bolt with a spanner,
etc.
(8) The detection gears should be

assembled onto the shaft with a
shrink fit temperature of 100 to 150,
while taking care not to twist the
gears. If the shrink fit temperature is
too high, the detection gears will
deform.
VI - 33
4 Bearings
(1) The counter-load side bracket can be Apply sealing agent Bracket fixing bolt
removed when the shaft box cover
fixing screw and bracket fixing
hexagon socket bolt are removed.
(2) Apply sealing agent on the

engagement surface when assembl-
ing the counter-load side bracket.
Shaft box cover fixing screw
(3) To remove the counter-load side

bearings, first remove the shaft
snap-ring. Then, by using a bearing
puller, turn the axis box cover and
puller bolt simultaneously with a
spanner.
Snap-ring for shaft
(4) To remove the load side bearings,

catch the claws of the puller onto the
inner ring of the bearings and turn the
handle.
VI - 34
(5) Before fitting the bearings onto the

shaft, wipe the bearing fitting section
clean and remove any scratches or
protrusions.
(6) Apply oil on the bearing's inner

Press.
diameter and shaft engagement
surface. Fit the bearing on at a right Pipe
angle, contact a suitable pipe against Bearing
the inner ring section, and gradually
press in with a press.
Attaching the bearings with a press
(7) If a press is not available, lightly tap

the bearings onto the shaft. Take
care not to twist the bearings or
contact the pipe against outer ring
section.
Pipe Bearing
Attaching the bearings with a hammer
VI - 35
Confirming the motor built-in encoder (speed detector) waveform

The waveform must be confirmed and adjusted before running the motor after disassembly to
reassembly.
The explanation here is for the encoder without the Z phase. Refer to the separate adjustment
procedures (BFN-14052-01) when using the encoder with Z phase.
1. PCB volume layout drawing

Check terminals
PA: A phase signal
PB: B phase signal
AGA: Ground
Volume
VR1: A phase 0 position adjustment
VR2: A phase gain adjustment
VR3: B phase 0 position adjustment
VR4: B phase gain adjustment
2. Confirmation method
(1) Set the spindle parameter SP038 (SFNC6) bit F to "1" and turn the spindle amplifier power
OFF and ON. (Enter the open loop.)
(2) Input the forward run command, and gradually raise the motor speed to 1800rpm.
(3) Measure the A and B phase waveforms with an oscilloscope.
(4) Confirm that the waveform is as shown below. If not as shown below, adjust with VR1 to VR4.
(5) If the waveform cannot be adjusted with VR1 to 4, readjust the gap between the sensor and
gear teeth.
1) If voltage level does not decrease below 1.6V: Increase the gap
2) If voltage level does not increase above 1.4V: Decrease the gap
(6) Next, reverse run the motor and measure the waveform at 1800rpm.
(7) Set the SP038 (SFNC6) bit F to "0" after completing the confirmation and adjustments, and
turn the spindle amplifier power OFF and ON.
A phase B phase A phase B phase

Voltage [V] Voltage [V]
Time Time
A phase/B phase output signal A phase/B phase output signal

waveform during forward run waveform during reverse run
VI - 36
3.2 Disassembling and assembling the SJ-N type AC spindle motor

Terminal box cover
1 Cable and PCB
(1) Remove the cover of the terminal box
on the top of the fan case.
(2) Disconnect the cable connected from

the power distribution box to the
motor.
(a) Three motor main lead wires
(U, V, W)
(b) Two cooling fan lead wires
(BU, BV)
(c) Two thermal protector lead wires
(OHS1, OHS2)
(d) PCB's external connector mate
plug
Fan case
(3) Remove the external connector from Pan head screw for fixing PCB PCB
the external connector fixing clamp,
and disconnect the internal
connector from the socket.
(4) The PCB can be removed by

removing the pan head screw fixing
the PCB.
(5) Reassemble the PCB by following

steps (1) to (4) in reverse.
External contactor fixing External connector Internal connector

clamp
Lead wire protection packing
VI - 37
(6) Installing the PCB
Method:
Fix together with the case
using two bolts.
Connect the sensor
connector.
Caution:
Do not connect the motor
power cable to the bottom of
the amplifier.
Motor cable is placed under the amplifier. Motor cable is protruding on the amplifier.
VI - 38
2 Cooling fan
90 frame
(1) When the two hexagon socket bolts
fixing the cooling fan are removed,
the cooling fan can be removed from
the fan case with the finger guard
attached.

following step (1) in reverse.
VI - 39
112 frame
(2) Remove the pan head screw at the

center of the cooling fan. Only the fan
will come off.
(3) Cut the four cooling fan lead wires

fan motor can be removed from the
fixing the fan motor body is removed.
VI - 40
(4) Reassemble the cooling fan by follow-

ing steps (1) to (3) in reverse.
Fan
motor
Finger
guard
Fan
3 Sensor and detection drum

(1) Disconnect the sensor's inner
connector from the PCB in the
terminal box.

attached.
Fixing screw for

installation
(3) When the two pan head screws fixing
the sensor installation seat are
removed, the installation seat will
come off with the sensor attached.
Take care not to contact the sensor
against the detection drum at this
time.
VI - 41
(4) Installing the sensor
Preparation:
Clean the sensor block
installation surface (motor
base) and sensor V-type
base side. (Blow with air.)
Method:
Lightly fix the sensor block
with a bolt. (To the degree
that the block can be
moved.)
Tighten the pull-in bolt so
that the sensor block is
pressed against the
installation surface, and the
V-type base side contacts
the side of the motor base
positioning ring.
Caution:
Make sure that the sensor
base does not deviate when
the bolt is tightened.
Do not apply force on the
flexible coupler.
(5) Apply screw lock on the sensor fixing

screw and installation seat fixing
screw.
(6) Pull the sensor lead wires sufficiently

into the terminal box so that they do
not get caught inside when assembl-
ing the fan case.
VI - 42
(7) Removing the drum
Method:
Forcibly pull out the drum with
a puller jig.
Caution:
The removed drum cannot be
reused.
To remove the detection drum, screw

an eye bolt into the screw hole (M8
screw), and by using a puller, turn the
puller bolt with a spanner, etc.
(8) Installing the drum
Condition:
Warm fitting (Heating
temperature: 150C or less)
Method:
Confirm that the drum has
been warmed to the
designated temperature.
Wear leather gloves, etc.
when holding the drum, and
quickly insert it.
Caution:
The heating device must not
have a magnetic field of 50G
or more. Do not wear cotton
gloves as they are slippery.
Confirmation:
Confirm that the drum has
been completely inserted.
VI - 43
4 Bearings
(1) The counter-load side bracket can be Apply sealing agent Bracket fixing bolt
removed when the shaft box cover
fixing screw and bracket fixing
hexagon socket bolt are removed.
(2) Apply sealing agent on the engage-

ment surface when assembling the
counter-load side bracket.
Shaft box cover fixing screw

(3) To remove the counter-load side
bearings, first remove the shaft
snap-ring. Then, by using a bearing
puller, turn the axis box cover and
puller bolt simultaneously with a
spanner.
Shaft snap-ring
(4) To remove the load side bearings,

catch the claws of the puller onto the
inner ring of the bearings and turn the
handle.
VI - 44
(5) Before fitting the bearings onto the

shaft, wipe the bearing fitting section Press.
clean and remove any scratches or
Pipe
protrusions.
Bearing
(6) Apply oil on the bearing's inner

diameter and shaft engagement
surface. Fit the bearing on at a right
angle, contact a suitable pipe against
the inner ring section, and gradually
press in with a press.
Attaching the bearings with a press
(7) If a press is not available, lightly tap

the bearings onto the shaft. Take
care not to twist the bearings or
contact the pipe against outer ring
section.
Pipe Bearing
Attaching the bearings with a hammer
VI - 45
4. Handling the Orientation Detector

4.1 Magnetic sensor type 1-point orientation
4.1.1 Operation of magnet and sensor
The sensor generates two types of voltage according to the positional relation with the magnet as shown in
Fig. 6-1.
Rotation direction
Installation plate
Magnet
Detection head
Output voltage
Amplifier
Output voltage
MS signal
+8 to +5V
Across CN6 (6) to (16)
-5V to 8V
+8 to +5V
LS signal
Across CN6 (7) to (17)
Fig. 6-1 Sensor output voltage
MS signal 0V is output at the center of the magnet, and the maximum voltage is generated at
both ends of the magnet. If the position shift amount is "0", control is applied so that
the operation stops at the position where this voltage is approx. 0V (center position).
The stop position can be changed to approx. 2.5V by setting the position shift.
LS signal The voltage is approximately constant within the magnet area. Use this to confirm that
the operation is stopped without fail within the magnet area.
VI - 46
4.1.2 Sequences, etc.
(1) Refer to section 1.3.2 Operation sequence (page VI-2) for details on the operation sequences.
(2) Refer to section 2.3 for details on the magnet and detection head installation methods, precautions
for installation and the outline dimensions.
4.2 Encoder type 4096-point orientation
4.2.1 Configuration
Drive unit
Sequence M19
M06
NC
Orientation command
Sequence
CN10
Orientation position command
CN11 (12-bit binary)
PLG
CN8 1:1
Encoder Spindle
CN6
Motor

(2) Refer to section 2.3 for details on the encoder installation methods, handling methods and the
outline dimensions.
4.3 Motor built-in encoder type 4-96-point orientation

(2) A detector is incorporated in the motor, so a special detector does not need to be installed.
VI - 47
Appendix 1 Parameter Setting List

MDS-B/C1-SPT Parameter setting list (1/3)
Customer:
Machine name:
[Setting 1] Drive unit : MDS-B/C1-SPT [Setting 2] Drive unit : MDS-B/C1-SPT
Motor : SJ- Motor : SJ-
Converter : MDS-B/C1-CV Converter : MDS-B/C1-CV
Remarks:
Standard Standard Standard
Signal Abbrev. Setting Signal Abbrev. Setting Signal Abbrev. Setting
setting setting setting
SP001 PGM 100 SP049 TLM2 20 SP097 SPECO 0000
SP002 PGE 100 SP050 TLM3 30 SP098 VGOP 63
SP003 0 SP051 TLM4 40 SP099 VGOI 60
SP004 OINP 16 SP052 TLM5 50 SP100 VGOD 15
SP005 OSP 0 SP053 TLM6 60 SP101 DINP 16
SP006 CSP 20 SP054 TLM7 70 SP102 OODR 32767
SP007 OPST 0 SP055 SETM 12 SP103 FTM 200
SP008 0 SP056 PYVR 50 SP104 TLOR 100
SP009 0 SP057 STOD 0 SP105 IQGO 100
SP010 0 SP058 0 SP106 IDGO 100
SP011 0 SP059 MKT 150 SP107 CSP2 0
SP012 0 SP060 MKT2 500 SP108 CSP3 0
SP013 0 SP061 MKIL 75 SP109 CSP4 0
SP014 0 SP062 0 SP110 0
SP015 0 SP063 OLT 60 SP111 0
SP016 0 SP064 OLL 110 SP112 0
SP017 TSP 6000 SP065 VCGN1 100 SP113 0
SP018 ZSP 50 SP066 VCSN1 0 SP114 OPER 0
SP019 CSN1 30 SP067 VIGWA 0 SP115 OSP2 0
SP020 SDTS 600 SP068 VIGWB 0 SP116 0
SP021 TLM1 10 SP069 VIGN 0 SP117 ORUT 0
SP022 VGNP1 63 SP070 FHz 0 SP118 ORCT 0
SP023 VGNI1 60 SP071 VR2WA 0 SP119 MPGH 0
SP024 0 SP072 VR2WB 0 SP120 MPGL 0
SP025 GRA1 1 SP073 VR2GN 0 SP121 MPCSH 0
SP026 GRA2 1 SP074 IGDEC 0 SP122 MPCSL 0
SP027 GRA3 1 SP075 R2KWS 0 SP123 MGDO 542
SP028 GRA4 1 SP076 FONS 0 SP124 MGD1 768
SP029 GRB1 1 SP077 TDSL 14 SP125 MGD2 384
SP030 GRB2 1 SP078 FPWM 0 SP126 0
SP031 GRB3 1 SP079 ILMT 0 SP127 0
SP032 GRB4 1 SP080 ILMA 0 SP128 VRFB 0
SP033 SFNC1 0000 SP081 0 SP129 PFBC 0
SP034 SFNC2 0000 SP082 0 SP130 VGHP1 0
SP035 SFNC3 0000 SP083 0 SP131 VGHI1 0
SP036 SFNC4 0000 SP084 0 SP132 VGHD1 0
SP037 SFNC5 0000 SP085 0 SP133 HPYV1 0
SP038 SFNC6 0000 SP086 0 SP134 VCGH1 0
SP039 ATYP 0000 SP087 DIQM 75 SP135 VCSH1 0
SP040 MTYP 0000 SP088 DIQN 3000 SP136 IQGH1 0
SP041 PTYP 0000 SP089 0 SP137 IDGH1 0
SP042 0 SP090 0 SP138 0
SP043 0 SP091 0 SP139 0
SP044 0 SP092 OFSI 200 SP140 VGHP2 0
SP045 CSNT 0 SP093 0 SP141 VGHI2 0
SP046 CSN2 0 SP094 LMAY 0 SP142 VGHD2 0
SP047 SDTR 30 SP095 VFAV 0 SP143 HPYV2 0
SP048 SUT 15 SP096 EGAR 0 SP144 VCGH2 0
BN U R (1/3)
A1 - 1

SP145 VCSH2 0 SP200 VGHP7 0 SP255 DA1MPY 0
SP146 IQGH2 0 SP201 VGHI7 0 SP256 DA2MPY 0
SP147 IDGH2 0 SP202 VGHD7 0 SP257 RPM 0000
SP148 0 SP203 HPYV7 0 SP258 NR 0000
SP149 0 SP204 VCGH7 0 SP259 NP 0000
SP150 VGHP3 0 SP205 VCSH7 0 SP260 NB 0000
SP151 VGHI3 0 SP206 IQGH7 0 SP261 NF 0000
SP152 VGHD3 0 SP207 IDGH7 0 SP262 PM 0000
SP153 HPYV3 0 SP208 0 SP263 PLG 0000
SP154 VCGH3 0 SP209 0 SP264 KVP 0000
SP155 VCSH3 0 SP210 0 SP265 KVI 0000
SP156 IQGH3 0 SP211 0 SP266 KVF 0000
SP157 IDGH3 0 SP212 0 SP267 KFP 0000
SP158 0 SP213 0 SP268 KFI 0000
SP159 0 SP214 0 SP269 PYLT 0000
SP160 VGHP4 0 SP215 0 SP270 KDP 0000
SP161 VGHI4 0 SP216 0 SP271 KDI 0000
SP162 VGHD4 0 SP217 0 SP272 KQP 0000
SP163 HPYV4 0 SP218 0 SP273 KQI 0000
SP164 VCGH4 0 SP219 0 SP274 IDSM 0000
SP165 VCSH4 0 SP220 0 SP275 IQSM 0000
SP166 IQGH4 0 SP221 0 SP276 KVDS 0000
SP167 IDGH4 0 SP222 0 SP277 KVQS 0000
SP168 0 SP223 0 SP278 TMLR 0000
SP169 0 SP224 0 SP279 TMLD 0000
SP170 VGHP5 0 SP225 OXKPH 0 SP280 TMLS 0000
SP171 VGHI5 0 SP226 OXKPL 0 SP281 KWS 0000
SP172 VGHD5 0 SP227 OXVKP 0 SP282 KWSR 0000
SP173 HPYV5 0 SP228 OXVKI 0 SP283 IQI 0000
SP174 VCGH5 0 SP229 OXSFT 0 SP284 M0 0000
SP175 VCSH5 0 SP230 0 SP285 M2 0000
SP176 IQGH5 0 SP231 0 SP286 FLUX 0000
SP177 IDGH5 0 SP232 0 SP287 KR2 0000
SP178 0 SP233 0 SP288 LR2 0000
SP179 0 SP234 0 SP289 ICT 0000
SP180 VGHP6 0 SP235 0 SP290 KI1 0000
SP181 VGHI6 0 SP236 0 SP291 TI 0000
SP182 VGHD6 0 SP237 0 SP292 VPWM 0000
SP183 HPYV6 0 SP238 0 SP293 IDLM 0000
SP184 VCGH6 0 SP239 0 SP294 0000
SP185 VCSH6 0 SP240 0 SP295 0000
SP186 IQGH6 0 SP241 0 SP296 0000
SP187 IDGH6 0 SP242 Vavx 0 SP297 0000
SP188 0 SP243 UTTM 0 SP298 0000
SP189 0 SP244 OPLP 0 SP299 0000
SP190 0 SP245 PGHS 0 SP300 0000
SP191 0 SP246 0 SP301 NPM 0000
SP192 FNCO 0 SP247 0 SP302 NICNT 0000
SP193 0 SP248 0 SP303 NICT 0000
SP194 SE2R 0 SP249 SMO 0 SP304 NCSM 0000
SP195 SE2T 0 SP250 LMO 0 SP305 NWR1 0000
SP196 0 SP251 0 SP306 NWR2 0000
SP197 0 SP252 0 SP307 NWR3 0000
SP198 0 SP253 DA1NO 0 SP308 NEV0 0000
SP199 0 SP254 DA2NO 0 SP309 NEV1 0000
BN U R (2/3)
A1 - 2

SP310 NEV2 0000 SP335 KDIL 0000 SP360 0000
SP311 NEV3 0000 SP336 KQPL 0000 SP361 0000
SP312 R2H 0000 SP337 KQIL 0000 SP362 0000
SP313 EDO 0000 SP338 IDSML 0000 SP363 0000
SP314 SPO 0000 SP339 IQSML 0000 SP364 0000
SP315 SBS 0000 SP340 KVDSL 0000 SP365 0000
SP316 SIQ 0000 SP341 KVQSL 0000 SP366 0000
SP317 DPO 0000 SP342 TMLRL 0000 SP367 0000
SP318 DBS 0000 SP343 TMLDL 0000 SP368 0000
SP319 DIQ 0000 SP344 TMLSL 0000 SP369 0000
SP320 BSD 0000 SP345 KWSL 0000 SP370 0000
SP321 RPML 0000 SP346 KWSRL 0000 SP371 0000
SP322 NRL 0000 SP347 IQIL 0000 SP372 0000
SP323 NPL 0000 SP348 MOL 0000 SP373 0000
SP324 NBL 0000 SP349 M2L 0000 SP374 0000
SP325 NFL 0000 SP350 FLUXL 0000 SP375 0000
SP326 PML 0000 SP351 KR2L 0000 SP376 R2HL 0000
SP327 PLGL 0000 SP352 LR2L 0000 SP377 EDOL 0000
SP328 KVPL 0000 SP353 ICTL 0000 SP378 SPOL 0000
SP329 KVIL 0000 SP354 KIIL 0000 SP379 SBSL 0000
SP330 KVFL 0000 SP355 TIL 0000 SP380 SIQL 0000
SP331 KFPL 0000 SP356 VPWML 0000 SP381 DPOL 0000
SP332 KFIL 0000 SP357 IDLML 0000 SP382 DBSL 0000
SP333 PYLTL 0000 SP358 0000 SP383 DIQL 0000
SP334 KDPL 0000 SP359 0000 SP384 BSDL 0000
Revision
BN U R (3/3)
A1 - 3
Appendix 2 Unit Conversion Table
Appendix 2 Unit Conversion Table

The correspondence of the conventional unit symbols used in this manual and the international unit
system (SI) is as shown below.
Unit symbols for SI

Conventional unit's
Name of amount unit and unit usable in Conversion value
symbol
combination
Weight/load
Kg f
(expresses mass)
The value is the same
Mass kg
Weight/load
Kg f N 1kg f=9.80665N
(concept of force)
Force Kg f N 1kg f=9.80665N
Torque Kg f cm Nm 1kg f cm=9.8066510-2N m
Inertia 2
Kg f cm s kg m2 1kg f cm s2=9.8066510-2kg m2
(J)
GD2
GD2 Kg f cm2 J= (g: Gravitational acceleration
4g 980cm/s2)
A2 - 1
Appendix 3 Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications
Appendix 3 Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit

Specifications
1. Outline
The MDS-B-SPT Series large capacity spindle unit (37kW, 45kW, 55kW) is an increased capacity
version of the MDS-B-SPT Series standard spindle unit (30kW or less).
Thus, the specification items other than those related to the increased capacity are the same as the
30kW or less capacity.
The items required for the increased capacity are explained in these specifications.
Refer to the "AC Servo/Spindle MDS-A Series/B Series Specifications Manual" (BNP-B3759) for
details on the other specifications.
2. List of units

DC power supply/regeneration control to drive Spindle motor control
unit
Capa- Capa-
Mass Outline Mass Outline
No. Type city No. Type city
(kg) drawing (kg) drawing
(kW) (kW)
(1) B-CVE-370 37 9.5 "6.(1)" (1) B-SPT-370 37 20 "6.(4)"
(2) B-CVE-450 45 20 "6.(2)" (2) B-SPT-450 45 21 "6.(5)"
(3) B-CVE-550 55 21 "6.(3)" (3) B-SPT-550 55 21 "6.(5)"
3. Selection of AC reactor (B-AL), contactor and NFB

Always install the following AC reactor and contactor on the input side of each power supply unit
(B-CVE-370/450/550). Note that only the contactor can be omitted for the B-CVE-370.
(Note 1) When using the MDS-B-CVE-450 or 550, always install one contactor for one power
supply unit. The power supply unit will be damaged if this contactor is omitted or shared.
(Note 2) Always install one ACL for one power supply unit. The power supply unit will be
damaged if this ACL is omitted or shared.
Selection of the NFB when using only one power supply unit is shown below as reference.
Outline
Power supply unit type B-CVE-370 B-CVE-450 B-CVE-550
drawing
AC reactor (ordered part) B-AL-37K B-AL-45K B-AL-55K "6 (6)"
Recommended contactor
SN150-AC200V SN150-AC200V SN180-AC200V
(non-ordered part)
Recommended NFB NF225CS3P- NF225CS3P- NF400CS3P-
(non-ordered part) 175A05 200A05 300A05
(Note) Even when OFF, a leakage current of 15mA or less flows through the coil connection terminal
MC1 for the power supply unit's external contactor. Thus, when using a contactor other than
that recommended above, do not use a connector that turns ON at 15mA or less or a
contactor that cannot be turned OFF at 15mA. When using a contactor with an internal
electronic circuit, consult with the contactor manufacturer and make sure that the contactor
will operate correctly even if a leakage current of 15mA or less flows.
A3 - 1
[Power supply unit] [Spindle drive unit]
Inside panel Outside Inside panel Outside

panel panel
4. Outline of units
Spindle Fin + fan

Power 400 380 drive unit 340
400 380 Fin + fan 340
supply unit
A3 - 2
Maintenance D1 D2
Maintenance D1 D2 area
area 250
W 250
(Side) (Side)
(Front)

Type MDS-B-CVE-370 MDS-B-CVE-450 MDS-B-CVE-550 MDS-B-SPT-370 MDS-B-SPT-450 MDS-B-SPT-550

W 150 240 300 240 300 300
D1 200 210 210 210 210 210
D2 120 115 120 115 120 120
Note) The D1 value includes the terminal block cover.
Panel cut dimension drawing
W2 W5 W1 W3
(Note 1) Looking from the front of the unit, the

spindle drive unit must be installed to
the left of the power supply unit.
The panel must be cut taking this into
Square Square consideration.
hole hole (Note 2) L+ and L- connection conductors are
enclosed with the CVE-450 and 550
capacities, so provide the dimensions
H1 H
between the units as shown below.
(Note 3) When using the CVE-260 to 300
capacities, cut the panel in the same
manner as for the CVE-370 capacity.
5. Panel cut dimension drawing
H2
A3 - 3
W4 W
8-M5 screw
Spindle drive unit Power supply unit
installation side installation side
(Front)

Type MDS-B-CVE-370 MDS-B-CVE-450 MDS-B-CVE-550 MDS-B-SPT-370 MDS-B-SPT-450 MDS-B-SPT-550
H 3600.3 3600.3 3600.3 3600.3 3600.3 3600.3
W 1421 2221 2821 2221 2821 2821
H1 3411 3411 3411 3411 3411 3411
H2 100.5 100.5 100.5 100.5 100.5 100.5
W1 600.3 1200.3 1800.3

W2 1200.3 1800.3 1800.3
W3 410.5 510.5 510.5 510.5 510.5 510.5
W4 130.5 180.5 180.5
W5 1050.5 1200.5 1200.5
6. Detailed outline drawing

(Note) The I-bolt installation hole is provided only on the top of the MDS-B-CVE-550 and
MDS-B-SPT-450/550 models.
The I-bolt (size: M10) is not enclosed, and must be prepared by the user. Use an I-bolt that is
between 13mm and 25mm long.
(1) MDS-B-CVE-370
2-6 hole 66
10
15
107
195
40.6
360
380
350
Fin
L+
L
L11
L21
MC1
AIR
FLOW
10
15
6 6
45 60
150 70 20 180 120
(2) MDS-B-CVE-450
180 21
10
18
AIR FLOW
178.5
339
360
380
344
Fin
L+ L+
L L
L11 L12 MC1

L1 L2 L3
L21 L22 MC2
10
18
20
4-6 hole
60 120 60 63 146 114
240
A3 - 4
(3) MDS-B-CVE-550
64
2-M10 screw, for I-bolt installation
Only on top
180
20
10
18
AIR
FLOW
178.5
340
360
380
344
Fin
L+ L+
L
L
L11 L12 MC1
L21 L22MC2 L1 L2 L3
10
18
20
4-6 hole
60 180 60 63 146 120
300
(4) MDS-B-SPT-370
180
10
18
21
AIR FLOW
178.5
339
360
380
344
Fin
L+
L
L11 L21
U V W
10
18
20
4-6 hole
60 120 60 62 146 114
240
A3 - 5
(5) MDS-B-SPT-450/550
64
2-M10 screw, for I-bolt installation
Only on top
180
10
18
20
AIR
FLOW
178.5
360
380
344
340
Fin
L+
L11 L21
U V W
10
18
20
4-6 hole
60 180 60 63 146 120
300
(6) ACL
1) 37kW, 45kW 2) 55kW
(for wire 6-M10 screw

connection) MAIN (for wire
6-M6 screw L11 L21 L31 connection)
D331
1
L12 L22 L32 MAIN

D3 1.5
D
D
(240)
D
L11 L21 L31

(240)
DRIVE
1.5
M5 screw L12 L22 L32

D
D2.5
M5 screw
D3
FG connection DRIVE
position FG connection
(with ground 701 4-815 slot position
mark)
PE connection position (installation hole) 4-1015 slot
Terminal cover
(installation hole)
PE connection
Terminal cover 2001.5 position
(with ground
mark)
175
75
145
45
90
190
2152.5 2202.5
ACL Compatible power ACL Compatible power

D3 D Mass D3 D Mass
model supply unit model supply unit
B-AL-37K B-CVE-370 110 150 10.0kg B-AL-55K B-CVE-550 200 320 10.0kg
B-AL-45K B-CVE-450 120 160 12.8kg
A3 - 6
7. Heating value
(1) Power supply unit (2) Spindle drive unit
Model Heating value (W) Model Heating value (W)
B-CVE-370 400 B-SPT-370 850
B-CVE-450 500 B-SPT-450 1000
B-CVE-550 600 B-SPT-550 1200
(Note 1) The heating value is the value at the continuous rated output.
(Note 2) Use the following expressions as a guide for the heating value outside the panel when
installing in an enclosed structure.
Unit Heating value outside panel
B-CVE-370 Heating value outside panel = (B-CVE heating value - 15) 0.75
B-CVE-450,550 Heating value outside panel = (B-CVE heating value - 30) 0.75
B-SPT-370,450,550 Heating value outside panel = (B-SPT heating value - 40) 0.75
8. Selection of power capacity

The power capacity required for the power supply unit is shown below.
Power supply unit model Power capacity (kVA)
B-CVE-370 54
B-CVE-450 63
B-CVE-550 77
9. Selecting of wire size

(1) Recommended power lead-in wire size
Select the wire size based on the power supply unit capacity as shown below regardless of the
motor type.
Recommended power-lead-in
Power supply unit model
wire size
B-CVE-370 HIV50mm2
B-CVE-450 HIV60mm2
B-CVE-550 HIV80mm2
(2) Recommended wire size for spindle motor output wire

Select the wire size based on the spindle drive unit capacity as shown below regardless of the
motor type.
Recommended wire size for
Spindle drive unit model
spindle motor output wire
B-SPT-370 HIV50mm2
B-SPT-450 HIV60mm2
B-SPT-550 HIV80mm2
(3) L+, L- link bar wire size

Power supply unit model L+, L- link bar wire size
B-CVE-370 HIV50mm2
B-CVE-450 Dedicated link bars are enclosed as accessories (always use accessories)
B-CVE-550 Dedicated link bars are enclosed as accessories (always use accessories)
(4) L11, L21, MC1

Regardless of the spindle drive unit and power supply unit capacities, use an IV2mm2 or more
wire size.
A3 - 7
10. Drive unit connection screw size

Type B-CVE-370 B-CVE-450 B-CVE-550 B-SPT-370 B-SPT-450
Left side Right side Left side Right side B-SPT-550
L1, L2, L3 M8 M8 M10 - -
U, V, W - - - M8 M10
L+, L- M6 M10 M6 M10 M6 M10 M10
L11, L21 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4
MC1 M4 M4 M4 - -

(1) Wiring system
The wiring system is the same as the standard MDS-A/B-SPT Series (30kW or less). (Refer to the
wiring system example below.)
Note that there are restrictions on installation and selection, so refer to the Restrictions given in
"12".
(a) When using MDS-B-CVE-370 or less
NC
MDS-B-SP(H) MDS-B-CVE
260 to 370 MDS-B
370 to 550 -Vx
CN1A
CN1B
CN1A
CN1B
To terminator or
battery unit
CN4
CN9
CN4
CN9
CN4
CN2
CN3
CN5
CN6
CN9
CN7
CN8
L+
L+ L+
L L L
L11
L11
L11 L21 L21
MC L21
U V W 1
L1 L2 L3 U V W
MC Contactor
AC reactor
PLG
MAG B-AL
ENC Spindle
motor
NFB Servomotor
For motor blower NFB
3 200VAC 50Hz
3 200 to 220VAC 60Hz
A3 - 8
(b) When using MDS-B-CVE-450 or 550
NC MDS-B-SP(H)-370 to 550 MDS-B-CVE-450 to 550 MDS-B-Vx
CN1A
CN1B
CN1A
CN1B
To terminator or
battery unit
CN9
CN4
CN4
CN9
CN4
CN9
CN2
CN3
CN5
CN6
Always use the link bar

enclosed with B-CVE.
CN7
CN8
L+
L+
L
L L11
L11L12 MC1
Upper L21
step
L11L21 U V W L21L22 MC2
Lower L1 L2 L3 U V W
step
Contactor
AC reactor
Servomotor
PLG B-AL
MAG
ENC Spindle
motor
NFB
For motor blower NFB
3 200VAC 50Hz
3 200 to 220VAC 60Hz
(Note 1) Connect the L11, L21 and MC1 external connections without removing the conductors
connected between L21 and L22, L22 and MC2, and L11 and L12 of the B-CVE-450/550.
(L12, L22 and MC2 are for special specifications, and normally, the external connection is
not required.)
(Note 2) Always connect the contactor to MC1 so that it can be controlled with the drive unit's internal
signal. The power supply unit could be damaged if the contactor is turned ON and OFF with
a separate user-prepared sequence.
A3 - 9
12. Restrictions
(1) Installation
Always install the B-SPT-370/450/550 to the left of the B-CVE-260 to 550.
When using B-CVE-450/550, always use the enclosed link bar to connect L+ and L- on the
B-SPT-370/450/550.
(a) Layout when connecting only one spindle drive unit to power supply unit
Install the B-CVE-260 to 370/450/550 to the right, and the B-SPT-370/450/550 to the left.
Always cut the panel according to the panel cut dimension drawings shown in "5".
<Refer to Example 1.>
(b) Layout when connecting multiple drive units to a large capacity power supply unit
The following number of servo/spindle drive units can be additionally connected.
When B-CVE-450 and B-SPT-370 are combined, 9kW (=45kW-37kW+1kW)
When B-CVE-550 and B-SPT-450 are combined, 11kW =55kW-45kW+1kW)
When B-CVE-450 and B-SPT-370 are combined, 19kW (=55kW-37kW+1kW)
worth of units' servo/spindle drive unit can be additionally added. In this case, install the
B-SPT-370/450 to the left of B-CVE-450/550 as shown in the panel cut dimension drawings
in "5". Install the additional drive units to the right of the B-CVE-450/
550.
If the spindle motor output differs from the spindle drive unit output, the above, excluding the
layout, may not always apply. (This is because the power supply unit output is determined by
the motor output.)
<Refer to Example 2.>
(2) Selection
(a) When using the B-CVE-450/550, one of the B-SPT-370/450/550 units must be selected for
the drive units connected to this power supply unit.
Only one B-SPT-370/450/550 can be connected to one B-CVE-450/550.
(b) When using B-SPT-370/450/550, the following power supply unit must be selected.
When using B-SPT-370: Select B-CVE-260 or more
Note that if the total of the servo/spindle motor output corresponds to the above power supply
unit with the normal selection method, that capacity power supply unit can be selected.
(Example 3) When using B-SPT-370

When total of servo/spindle motor output is 23kW or less: Select B-CVE-260
When total of servo/spindle motor output is 23.1kW or more:
Select power supply unit selected with normal selection method.


A3 - 10
(Example 1) (Example 2)
SP-450 CVE-450 SP-370 CVE-450 V1-452
13. Parameters
The parameters added and changed for the 30kW or less drive unit are as shown below. The
parameters other than those shown below are the same as the 30kW or less capacity. Refer to the
"AC Servo/Spindle MDS-A Series/B Series Specifications Manual" (BNP-B3759) for details.

SP039 ATYP Select the capacity of the drive unit to be used. HEX
setting
Setting
Drive unit type
value
000D MDS-B-SPT-370
000E MDS-B-SPT-450
0010 MDS-B-SPT-550
SP041 PTYP Select the capacity of the power supply unit to be used. HEX
setting
Setting
Power supply unit type
value
0126 MDS-B-CVE-260
0130 MDS-B-CVE-300
0137 MDS-B-CVE-370
0145 MDS-B-CVE-450
0155 MDS-B-CVE-550
(Note 1) When using the external emergency stop function, add 40

to the above setting value.
(Example) When using external emergency stop function
with B-CVE-450
0145+0040=0185
14. Precautions
(1) After turning the power OFF, wait at least 15 seconds before turning it ON again.
If the power is turned ON within 15 seconds, the drive unit's control power may not start up
correctly.
A3 - 11
Revision History
Date of revision Manual No. Revision details
Dec. 2004 BNP-C3015A First edition created.

Notice
Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the
contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some
unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible.
Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments
regarding the use of this product.
Duplication Prohibited
This instruction manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole,
without written permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
HEAD OFFICE : MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG., 2-2-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
MODEL MDS-B-SPT/MDS-C1-SPT Series

MODEL
CODE 008-342
Manual No. BNP-C3015A(ENG)

Specifications subject to change without notice.
(0412) MEE Printed in Japan on recycled paper.

BNP C3015 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BNP C3015 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CNC

SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Notes on Reading This Manual

Precautions for safety

Incorrect handling could lead to a hazardous situation and result in

When a dangerous situation may occur if handling is mistaken

Spindle drive unit

Changes to terminal names

1. Electric shock prevention

(1) Transportation and installation

Do not transport the spindle motor when it is installed on the machine.

Do not place heavy objects on the spindle motor or spindle amplifier.

Storage humidity 90% RH or less

(4) Usage methods

(8) General precautions

2. Cautions for EC Directive compliance

(3) Power supply

(6) Peripheral devices and options

I. MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle System Configuration Section

II. MDS-B/C1-CV Power Regeneration Type Power Supply Section

IV. Maintenance MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle System Configuration Section

VI. Maintenance MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle Drive Unit Section

(2) Compact and lightweight

(3) Standardization of dimensions

(4) Low heat generation

(5) Separable units

(6) High-speed and precision processing

(7) High-speed spindle orientation

(8) Simple parameter input

(9) MDS-B/V1 Series features

(b) Addition of power supply emergency stop input line

1.2 Precautions for use

(1) Basic system configuration

Spindle drive Power supply

Power supply RST

Spindle motor Spindle motor fan power

(2) List of units

(3) List of unit dimensions

(Fin section D: 120) W: 90 W: 120 W: 150

The A0 type has no fin.

(Fin section D: 120) W: 90 W: 120 W: 150

The A0 type has no fin.

Front Rear Intake

(5) Installation of cooling fan

Front view of units

4. Connection of Each Unit

not tighten the grounding wires together.

For B/C1-SPT For B/C1-CV

L21 devices (contactor, magnetic brakes,

4.1 Layout of each unit

(1) When installing one spindle drive

(2) When installing two spindle drives

Spindle Power Spindle

(b) When the total spindle drive output exceeds 37kW

Spindle Power Spindle Power

4.2 Link bar specifications

Link bar specifications

An outline connection diagram is shown below for reference.

(1) Outline connection drawing

4.3 Precautions for installing multiple power supply units

NC(PC) MDS-B/C1-SPT(No.1) MDS-B/C1-CV(No.1) MDS-B/C1-SPT(No.2) MDS-A/B-CV(No.2)

L11, L21 L11, L21

L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3